Thermo Fisher Scientific 17i User Manual

Model 17i

Instruction Manual

Chemiluminescence NH

3

Analyzer

Part Number 103260-00

27Jun2014

© 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved.

Specifications, terms and pricing are subject to change. Not all products are available in all countries. Please consult your local sales representative for details.

Thermo Fisher Scientific

Air Quality Instruments

27 Forge Parkway

Franklin, MA 02038

1-508-520-0430 www.thermo.com/aqi


WEEE Compliance

This product is required to comply with the European Union’s Waste

Electrical & Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. It is marked with the following symbol:

Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling/disposal companies in each EU Member State, and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them. Further information on

Thermo Fisher Scientific’s compliance with these Directives, the recyclers in your country, and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at: www.thermo.com/WEEERoHS.

WEEE Compliance


About This Manual

This manual provides information about installing, operating, maintaining, and servicing the Model 17i analyzer. It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage. The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information.

●

Chapter 1 “ Introduction ” provides an overview of product features, describes the principles of operation, and lists the specifications.

●

●

●

●

Chapter 2 “ Installation ” describes how to unpack, setup, and startup the analyzer.

Chapter 3 “ Operation ” describes the front panel display, the front panel pushbuttons, and the menu-driven software.

Chapter 4 “ Calibration ” provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment.

Chapter 5 “ Preventive Maintenance ” provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation.

●

●

●

●

●

●

Chapter 6 “ Troubleshooting ” presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures, isolating faults, and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation.

Chapter 7 “ Servicing ” presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer, step-by-step instructions for repairing and replacing components, and a replacement parts list. It also includes contact information for product support and technical information.

Chapter 8 “ System Description ” describes the function and location of the system components, provides an overview of the software structure, and includes a description of the system electronics and input/output connections.

Chapter 9 “ Optional Equipment ” describes the optional equipment that can be used with this analyzer.

Appendix A “ Warranty ” is a copy of the warranty statement.

Appendix B “ C-Link Protocol Commands ” provides a description of the C-Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger.

Model 17i Instruction Manual i


Safety

●

●

Appendix C “ MODBUS Protocol ” provides a description of the

MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485

(RTU protocol) as well as TCP/IP over Ethernet.

Appendix D “ Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol ” provides a description of the Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen or BH) Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485 as well as TCP/IP over

Ethernet.

Safety

Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer.

This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer, however, if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

Safety and Equipment

Damage Alerts

This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage. Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual.

Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions

Alert

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Description

A hazard is present that will result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored.

▲

A hazard is present or an unsafe practice can result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored.

▲

The hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored.

▲

Equipment Damage

The hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored.

▲

ii Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific



Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts

Safety and Equipment damage Alerts in this Manual

Alert

WARNING

CAUTION

Description

If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

▲

The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only.

▲

The Model 17i is supplied with a three-wire grounding cord. Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated.

▲

Ozone is present in the exhaust, therefore, the exhaust should be plumbed to a suitable vent.

▲

If the LCD panel breaks, do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes, wash it off immediately using soap and water.

▲

Equipment Damage

Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings.

▲

Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component.

▲

This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician.

▲

Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges only.

▲

Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module.

▲

The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it carefully.

▲

Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth, it may easily scratch the plate.

▲

Do not use Ketonics solvent or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent.

▲

Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases.

▲

Do not shake or jolt the LCD module.

▲

Model 17i Instruction Manual iii


FCC Compliance

FCC Compliance

Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. ▲

WEEE Symbol

The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation.

Symbol Description

Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE) and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005.

▲

Where to Get Help

Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide. Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.

1-866-282-0430 Toll Free

1-508-520-0430 International

iv Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Contents

Introduction ........................................................................................................ 1-1

Principle of Operation ........................................................................ 1-2

Specifications ...................................................................................... 1-3

Installation ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Lifting ................................................................................................. 2-1

Unpacking and Inspection .................................................................. 2-1

Setup Procedure .................................................................................. 2-2

Connecting External Devices .............................................................. 2-6

Terminal Board PCB Assemblies ...................................................... 2-6

I/O Terminal Board ...................................................................... 2-6

D/O Terminal Board .................................................................... 2-8

25-Pin Terminal Board ................................................................. 2-9

Startup .............................................................................................. 2-11

Operation ............................................................................................................ 3-1

Display ................................................................................................ 3-1

Pushbuttons ........................................................................................ 3-2

Soft Keys .......................................................................................... 3-3

Software Overview .............................................................................. 3-4

Power-Up Screen ............................................................................. 3-6

Run Screen ....................................................................................... 3-6

Main Menu ...................................................................................... 3-7

Range Menu ....................................................................................... 3-8

Single Range Mode .......................................................................... 3-8

Dual Range Mode ............................................................................ 3-9

Auto Range Mode .......................................................................... 3-11

Gas Units ....................................................................................... 3-13

NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Ranges ........................................... 3-13

Set Custom Ranges ........................................................................ 3-15

Custom Ranges ........................................................................... 3-16

Averaging Time ................................................................................. 3-16

Calibration Factors Menu ................................................................. 3-17

NO, NO x

, and N t

Backgrounds ..................................................... 3-18

NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Coefficients .................................... 3-19

Reset User Calibration Default ....................................................... 3-20

Calibration Menu ............................................................................. 3-20

Calibrate NO, NO x

and N t

Backgrounds ....................................... 3-21

Calibrate NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Coefficients ..................... 3-22

Model 17i Instruction Manual v

Contents

vi Model 17i Instruction Manual

Zero/Span Check ........................................................................... 3-22

Next Time .................................................................................. 3-23

Period Hours ............................................................................... 3-23

Zero/Span/Purge Duration Minutes ........................................... 3-24

Zero/Span Averaging Time ......................................................... 3-24

Zero/Span Ratio .......................................................................... 3-24

Instrument Controls Menu ............................................................... 3-25

Ozonator ........................................................................................ 3-25

PMT Supply .................................................................................. 3-26

Auto/Manual Mode ....................................................................... 3-26

Datalogging Settings ...................................................................... 3-27

Select SREC/LREC ..................................................................... 3-27

View Logged Data ....................................................................... 3-28

Number of Records ..................................................................... 3-28

Date and Time ............................................................................ 3-28

Erase Log .................................................................................... 3-29

Select Content ............................................................................. 3-29

Choose Item Type ....................................................................... 3-30

Concentrations ............................................................................ 3-30

Other Measurements ................................................................... 3-31

Analog Inputs .............................................................................. 3-32

Commit Content ........................................................................ 3-32

Reset to Default Content ............................................................ 3-32

Configure Datalogging ................................................................ 3-33

Logging Period Min .................................................................... 3-33

Memory Allocation Percent ......................................................... 3-33

Data Treatment .......................................................................... 3-34

Communication Settings ................................................................ 3-34

Baud Rate ................................................................................... 3-35

Instrument ID ............................................................................. 3-35

Communication Protocol ............................................................ 3-35

Streaming Data Configuration .................................................... 3-36

Streaming Data Interval .............................................................. 3-36

Choose Item Signal ..................................................................... 3-37

Concentrations ............................................................................ 3-37

Other Measurements ................................................................... 3-38

Analog Inputs .............................................................................. 3-38

RS-232/RS-485 Selection ............................................................ 3-39

TCP/IP Settings .......................................................................... 3-39

Use DHCP ................................................................................. 3-40

IP Address ................................................................................... 3-40

Netmask ...................................................................................... 3-40

Default Gateway ......................................................................... 3-41

Host Name ................................................................................. 3-41

I/O Configuration .......................................................................... 3-41

Output Relay Settings ................................................................. 3-42



Contents

Logic State .................................................................................. 3-42

Instrument State ......................................................................... 3-42

Alarms ......................................................................................... 3-43

Non-Alarm ................................................................................. 3-44

Digital Input Settings .................................................................. 3-44

Logic State .................................................................................. 3-44

Instrument Action ....................................................................... 3-45

Analog Output Configuration ..................................................... 3-45

Select Output Range ................................................................... 3-46

Minimum and Maximum Value ................................................. 3-46

Choose Signal to Output ............................................................ 3-48

Analog Input Configuration ........................................................ 3-49

Descriptor ................................................................................... 3-50

Units ........................................................................................... 3-50

Decimal Places ............................................................................ 3-51

Number of Table Points .............................................................. 3-51

Table Point ................................................................................. 3-51

Volts ........................................................................................... 3-52

User Value .................................................................................. 3-52

Temperature Compensation ........................................................... 3-53

Pressure Compensation .................................................................. 3-53

Screen Contrast .............................................................................. 3-54

Service Mode ................................................................................. 3-54

Date/Time ..................................................................................... 3-55

Diagnostics Menu ............................................................................. 3-55

Program Version ............................................................................ 3-55

Voltages ......................................................................................... 3-56

Motherboard Voltages ................................................................. 3-56

Interface Board Voltages ............................................................. 3-56

I/O Board Voltages ..................................................................... 3-57

External Converter Board Voltages.............................................. 3-57

Temperatures ................................................................................. 3-57

Pressure .......................................................................................... 3-58

Flow ............................................................................................... 3-58

Analog Input Readings ................................................................... 3-58

Analog Input Voltages .................................................................... 3-59

Digital Inputs ................................................................................. 3-59

Relay States .................................................................................... 3-59

Test Analog Outputs ...................................................................... 3-60

Set Analog Outputs ..................................................................... 3-60

Instrument Configuration .............................................................. 3-60

Contact Information ...................................................................... 3-61

Alarms Menu .................................................................................... 3-61

Internal Temperature ..................................................................... 3-62

Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits ................................. 3-63

Chamber Temperature ................................................................... 3-63

Model 17i Instruction Manual vii

Contents

viii Model 17i Instruction Manual

Min and Max Chamber Temperature Limits .............................. 3-63

Capillary Temperature ................................................................... 3-64

Min and Max Capillary Temperature Limits ............................... 3-64

Cooler Temperature ....................................................................... 3-64

Min and Max Cooler Temperature Limits .................................. 3-65

Converter Temperature .................................................................. 3-65

Min and Max Converter Temperature Limits ............................. 3-65

External Converter Temperature .................................................... 3-66

Min and Max External Converter Temperature Limits ............... 3-66

Pressure .......................................................................................... 3-67

Min and Max Pressure Limits ..................................................... 3-67

Flow ............................................................................................... 3-67

Min and Max Flow Limits .......................................................... 3-68

Ozonator Flow ............................................................................... 3-68

Zero and Span Check ..................................................................... 3-68

Max Zero and Span Offset .......................................................... 3-69

Zero and Span Auto Calibration .................................................... 3-69

NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Concentration ................................ 3-69

Min and Max NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Concentration

Limits .......................................................................................... 3-70

Min Trigger ................................................................................ 3-70

Service Menu .................................................................................... 3-71

PMT Voltage Adjustment .............................................................. 3-71

Range Mode Select ......................................................................... 3-72

Converter Set Temperature ............................................................ 3-72

External Converter Set Temperature .............................................. 3-73

Pressure Calibration ....................................................................... 3-73

Calibrate Pressure Zero ............................................................... 3-74

Calibrate Pressure Span ............................................................... 3-74

Restore Default Pressure Calibration ........................................... 3-75

Flow Calibration ............................................................................ 3-75

Calibrate Flow Zero .................................................................... 3-75

Calibrate Flow Span .................................................................... 3-76

Restore Default Flow Calibration ................................................ 3-76

Input Board Calibration ................................................................. 3-77

Manual Input Calibration ........................................................... 3-77

Automatic Input Calibration ....................................................... 3-78

Input Frequency Display ............................................................. 3-78

Temperature Calibration ................................................................ 3-79

Analog Output Calibration ............................................................ 3-79

Analog Output Calibrate Zero .................................................... 3-80

Analog Output Calibrate Full-Scale ............................................ 3-80

Analog Input Calibration ............................................................... 3-81

Analog Input Calibrate Zero ....................................................... 3-81

Analog Input Calibrate Full-Scale ............................................... 3-82

Ozonator Safety ............................................................................. 3-82



Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Contents

Extended Ranges ............................................................................ 3-82

Dilution Ratio ................................................................................ 3-83

Display Pixel Test .......................................................................... 3-83

Restore User Defaults ..................................................................... 3-83

Password Menu ................................................................................. 3-84

Set Password .................................................................................. 3-84

Lock Instrument ............................................................................... 3-84

Change Password .............................................................................. 3-85

Remove Password .............................................................................. 3-85

Unlock Instrument ............................................................................ 3-85

Calibration .......................................................................................................... 4-1

Equipment Required ........................................................................... 4-1

Zero Gas Generator.......................................................................... 4-2

Compression ................................................................................. 4-2

Drying .......................................................................................... 4-2

Oxidation ...................................................................................... 4-2

Scrubbing ...................................................................................... 4-2

Gas Phase Titrator............................................................................ 4-3

Flow Controllers ........................................................................... 4-3

Pressure Regulator ......................................................................... 4-3

Ozone Generator .......................................................................... 4-4

Diverter Valve ............................................................................... 4-4

Reaction Chamber ........................................................................ 4-4

Mixing Chamber ........................................................................... 4-4

Output Manifold .......................................................................... 4-4

Reagents ........................................................................................... 4-4

NO Concentration Standard ......................................................... 4-4

Assaying a Working NO Standard Against a NIST-traceable NO

Standard ........................................................................................ 4-5

Zero Air ........................................................................................ 4-6

Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas Titrator .......................... 4-6

Determining GPT System Flow Conditions ................................. 4-6

Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer ......................................... 4-8

Pre-Calibration ................................................................................... 4-9

Calibration ........................................................................................ 4-10

Alternative Calibration Procedure Using NO

2

/NH

3

Permeation

Tube .............................................................................................. 4-16

Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode ............................ 4-17

Zero and Span Check ........................................................................ 4-18

Preventive Maintenance ................................................................................. 5-1

Safety Precautions ............................................................................... 5-1

Replacement Parts ............................................................................... 5-2

Cleaning the Outside Case .................................................................. 5-2

Model 17i Instruction Manual ix

Contents

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

x Model 17i Instruction Manual

Visual Inspection and Cleaning ........................................................... 5-2

Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement ............................... 5-2

Capillary Inspection and Replacement ................................................ 5-2

Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement .............................. 5-4

Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning .......................... 5-6

Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning .................................................... 5-6

Pump Rebuilding ................................................................................ 5-7

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 6-1


Troubleshooting Guides ...................................................................... 6-1

Board-Level Connection Diagrams ..................................................... 6-9

Connector Pin Descriptions .............................................................. 6-11

Service Locations ............................................................................... 6-27

Servicing ............................................................................................................. 7-1


Firmware Updates ............................................................................... 7-4

Accessing the Service Mode ................................................................. 7-4

Replacement Parts List ........................................................................ 7-4

Cable List ............................................................................................ 7-6

External Device Connection Components .......................................... 7-7

Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel7-10

Pump Replacement ........................................................................... 7-11

Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement .......................... 7-12

Diaphragm Replacement ................................................................ 7-13

Valve Replacement ......................................................................... 7-14

Fan Replacement ............................................................................... 7-16

PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement ............ 7-17

Photomultiplier Tube Replacement .................................................. 7-19

PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement ................................ 7-20

PMT Voltage Adjustment ................................................................. 7-21

Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal .......................................... 7-22

NO

2

-to-NO Converter Replacement ................................................ 7-24

NH

3

Converter Replacement ............................................................ 7-25

Solenoid Valve Replacement ............................................................. 7-27

Ozonator Assembly Replacement ...................................................... 7-28

Ozonator Transformer Replacement ................................................. 7-30

Input Board Replacement ................................................................. 7-30

Input Board Calibration .................................................................... 7-32

DC Power Supply Replacement ........................................................ 7-32

Analog Output Testing ..................................................................... 7-33

Analog Output Calibration ............................................................... 7-36

Analog Input Calibration .................................................................. 7-37

Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts ................................ 7-37



Chapter 8

Contents

Calibrating the Input Channels to Full-Scale ................................. 7-37

Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement ...................................... 7-38

Pressure Transducer Calibration ........................................................ 7-39

Temperature Control Board Replacement ......................................... 7-41

Thermistor Replacement ................................................................... 7-41

Ambient Temperature Calibration .................................................... 7-42

Fuse Replacement ............................................................................. 7-43

Ammonia Scrubber Replacement ...................................................... 7-44

I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement ................................. 7-45

Digital Output Board Replacement ................................................... 7-46

Motherboard Replacement ................................................................ 7-47

Measurement Interface Board Replacement ...................................... 7-48

Flow Transducer Replacement .......................................................... 7-49

Flow Transducer Calibration ............................................................. 7-50

Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement ........................ 7-52

Converter Interface Board Replacement ............................................ 7-52

Front Panel Board Replacement ........................................................ 7-54

LCD Module Replacement ............................................................... 7-55

Service Locations ............................................................................... 7-56

System Description .......................................................................................... 8-1

Hardware ............................................................................................ 8-1

NO

2

-to-NO Converter ....................................................................... 8-3

Mode Solenoid ................................................................................. 8-3

NH

3

Converter ................................................................................... 8-3

Reaction Chamber .............................................................................. 8-4

Optical Filter .................................................................................... 8-4

Pressure Transducer ......................................................................... 8-4

Sample Flow Sensor ......................................................................... 8-4

Ozonator ............................................................................................. 8-4

Ozonator Flow Switch ..................................................................... 8-4

Photomultiplier Tube ......................................................................... 8-4

Photomultiplier Tube Cooler .............................................................. 8-4

External Pump .................................................................................... 8-5

Dry Air Capillary ............................................................................. 8-5

Ammonia Scrubber ............................................................................. 8-5

Software .............................................................................................. 8-5

Instrument Control .......................................................................... 8-5

Monitoring Signals ........................................................................... 8-5

Measurement Calculations ............................................................... 8-6

Output Communication .................................................................. 8-6

Electronics .......................................................................................... 8-7

Motherboard .................................................................................... 8-7

External Connectors ...................................................................... 8-7

Internal Connectors ...................................................................... 8-8

Measurement Interface Board .......................................................... 8-8

Model 17i Instruction Manual xi

Contents

Chapter 9

Appendix A

Appendix B

Measurement Interface Board Connectors ..................................... 8-8

Converter Interface Board ................................................................ 8-8

Converter Interface Board Connectors .......................................... 8-9

Flow Sensor Assembly ...................................................................... 8-9

Pressure Sensor Assembly ................................................................. 8-9

Temperature Control Board ............................................................. 8-9

Converter Temperature Control Board .......................................... 8-10

PMT Power Supply Assembly ........................................................ 8-10

Input Board Assembly .................................................................... 8-10

Digital Output Board ..................................................................... 8-10

I/O Expansion Board (Optional) ................................................... 8-11

Front Panel Connector Board ........................................................ 8-11

I/O Components ............................................................................... 8-11

Analog Voltage Outputs ................................................................. 8-11

Analog Current Outputs (Optional) .............................................. 8-12

Analog Voltage Inputs (Optional) .................................................. 8-12

Digital Relay Outputs .................................................................... 8-12

Digital Inputs ................................................................................. 8-12

Serial Ports ..................................................................................... 8-13

RS-232 Connection ....................................................................... 8-13

RS-485 Connection ....................................................................... 8-14

Ethernet Connection ...................................................................... 8-14

External Accessory Connector ........................................................ 8-14

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................... 9-1

Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves ................................................ 9-1

Ozonator Permeation Dryer ................................................................ 9-2

Teflon Particulate Filter ...................................................................... 9-2

Ozone Particulate Filter ...................................................................... 9-2

I/O Expansion Board Assembly ........................................................... 9-2

25-Pin Terminal Board Assembly ........................................................ 9-2

Terminal Block and Cable Kits ........................................................... 9-3

Cables ................................................................................................. 9-3

Mounting Options .............................................................................. 9-5

Warranty ............................................................................................................. A-1

C-Link Protocol Commands ............................................................................ B-1

Instrument Identification Number ...................................................... B-1

Commands ......................................................................................... B-2

Commands List ................................................................................ B-2

Measurements ................................................................................... B-11

Alarms ............................................................................................... B-15

Diagnostics ....................................................................................... B-20

Datalogging....................................................................................... B-20

xii Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Appendix C

Appendix D

Contents

Calibration ........................................................................................ B-28

Keys/Display ..................................................................................... B-31

Measurement Configuration ............................................................. B-33

Hardware Configuration ................................................................... B-37

Communications Configuration ....................................................... B-41

I/O Configuration ............................................................................. B-46

Record Layout Definition ................................................................. B-51

Format Specifier for ASCII Responses ............................................ B-51

Format Specifier for Binary Responses ........................................... B-52

Format Specifier for EREC Layout ................................................. B-52

Text ............................................................................................ B-52

Value String ................................................................................ B-53

Value Source ............................................................................... B-53

Alarm Information ...................................................................... B-53

Translation Table ........................................................................ B-53

Selection Table ............................................................................ B-53

Button Designator....................................................................... B-54

Examples ..................................................................................... B-54

MODBUS Protocol ............................................................................................ C-1

Serial Communication Parameters ..................................................... C-1

TCP Communication Parameters ...................................................... C-2

Application Data Unit Definition ...................................................... C-2

Slave Address ................................................................................... C-2

MBAP Header ................................................................................ C-2

Function Code ................................................................................ C-3

Data ................................................................................................ C-3

Error Check .................................................................................... C-3

Function Codes .................................................................................. C-3

(0x01/0x02) Read Coils / Read Inputs ............................................ C-3

(0x03/0x04) Read Holding Registers / Read Input Registers ........... C-5

(0x05) Force (Write) Single Coil ..................................................... C-7

MODBUS Parameters Supported ...................................................... C-8

Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol .......................................................... D-1

Serial Communication Parameters ..................................................... D-1

TCP Communication Parameters ...................................................... D-2

Instrument Address ............................................................................ D-2

Abbreviations Used ............................................................................ D-2

Basic Command Structure ................................................................. D-2

Block Checksum <BCC> ................................................................... D-3

Geysitech Commands ........................................................................ D-3

Instrument Control Command (ST) ............................................... D-3

Data Sampling/Data Query Command (DA) .................................. D-4

Measurements reported in response to DA command ..................... D-6

Model 17i Instruction Manual xiii

Contents

Single Range Mode ...................................................................... D-6

Dual/Auto Range Mode ............................................................... D-6

Operating and Error Status ............................................................. D-7

xiv Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Figures

Figure 1–1. Model 17i Flow Schematic ............................................................. 1-3

Figure 2–1. Remove the Packing Material ......................................................... 2-2

Figure 2–2. Model 17i and Converter Module Rear Panels .............................. 2-3

Figure 2–3. Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing ............................................. 2-4

Figure 2–4. Twin-Head Vacuum Pump Installation ............................................ 2-5

Figure 2–5. I/O Terminal Board Views ............................................................... 2-7

Figure 2–6. D/O Terminal Board Views .............................................................. 2-8

Figure 2–7. 25-Pin Terminal Board Views .......................................................... 2-9

Figure 3–1. Front Panel Display .......................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3–2. Front Panel Pushbuttons .................................................................. 3-2

Figure 3–3. Flowchart of Menu-Driven Software .............................................. 3-5

Figure 3–4. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode ............... 3-9

Figure 3–5. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode ................ 3-10

Figure 3–6. Analog Output in Auto Range Mode ............................................. 3-11

Figure 3–7. Pin-Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode .......................... 3-12

Figure 4–1. GPT System ...................................................................................... 4-3

Figure 5–1. Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries ....................................... 5-3

Figure 5–2. Inspecting and Replacing the Converter Capillaries ....................... 5-5

Figure 5–3. Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters .......................................... 5-7

Figure 5–4. Rebuilding the Pump........................................................................ 5-9

Figure 6–1. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Common Electronics ............... 6-9

Figure 6–2. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Measurement System .......... 6-10

Figure 6–3. Board-Level Connection Diagram – External Converter ............... 6-11

Figure 7–1. Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap ...................................... 7-4

Figure 7–2. Analyzer Module Component Layout .............................................. 7-8

Figure 7–3. Converter Module Component Layout ............................................ 7-9

Figure 7–4. Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition

Panel ................................................................................................................... 7-10

Figure 7–5. Replacing the Pump ....................................................................... 7-12

Figure 7–6. Vacuum Pump – Head Plate and Motor View .............................. 7-15

Figure 7–7. Replacing the Fan .......................................................................... 7-16

Figure 7–8. PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber .............................................. 7-18

Figure 7–9. Replacing the PMT ........................................................................ 7-19

Figure 7–10. Replacing the PMT HVPS ............................................................ 7-21

Figure 7–11. Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber ............................ 7-23

Figure 7–12. NO

2

-to-NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly ........................... 7-25

Model 17i Instruction Manual xv

Figures

Figure 7–13. NH

3

Converter Heater Core Assembly ......................................... 7-27

Figure 7–14. Replacing the Solenoid Valve ...................................................... 7-28

Figure 7–15. Replacing the Ozonator Assembly ............................................... 7-29

Figure 7–16. Replacing the Input Board ........................................................... 7-31

Figure 7–17. Replacing the DC Power Supply .................................................. 7-33

Figure 7–18. Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins ................................... 7-34

Figure 7–19. Replacing the Pressure Transducer ............................................. 7-39

Figure 7–20. Replacing the Thermistor ............................................................. 7-42

Figure 7–21. Replacing the Ammonia Scrubbers ............................................. 7-45

Figure 7–22. Replacing the I/O Expansion Board (Optional) ............................ 7-46

Figure 7–23. Rear Panel Board Connectors ...................................................... 7-46

Figure 7–24. Replacing the Measurement Interface Board ............................. 7-49

Figure 7–25. Replacing the Flow Transducer ................................................... 7-50

Figure 7–26. Replacing the Converter Interface Board .................................... 7-53

Figure 7–27. Rear Panel Converter Interface Board Connector ....................... 7-53

Figure 7–28. Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module ............... 7-54

Figure 8–1. Analyzer Module Hardware Components ....................................... 8-2

Figure 8–2. Converter Module Hardware Components ...................................... 8-3

Figure 9–1. Flow Diagram, Zero/Span Option .................................................... 9-2

Figure 9–2. Rack Mount Option Assembly ......................................................... 9-5

Figure 9–3. Bench Mounting ............................................................................... 9-6

Figure 9–4. EIA Rack Mounting .......................................................................... 9-7

Figure 9–5. Retrofit Rack Mounting .................................................................... 9-8

Figure B–1. Flags .............................................................................................. B-15

xvi Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Tables

Table 1–1. Model 17i Specifications ................................................................. 1-3

Table 2–1. I/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ................................................ 2-7

Table 2–2. D/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions............................................... 2-8

Table 2–3. 25-Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ........................................... 2-9

Table 3–1. Front Panel Pushbuttons ................................................................... 3-3

Table 3–2. Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode ............................... 3-9

Table 3–3. Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode ............................... 3-10

Table 3–4. Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode ............................... 3-12

Table 3–5. Standard Ranges ............................................................................. 3-14

Table 3–6. Extended Ranges ............................................................................ 3-15

Table 3–7. Analog Output Zero to Full-Scale Table ......................................... 3-47

Table 3–8. Signal Type Group Choices ............................................................. 3-49

Table 4–1. Scrubbing Materials ......................................................................... 4-2

Table 6–1. Troubleshooting - General Guide ..................................................... 6-2

Table 6–2. Troubleshooting - Alarm Messages ................................................. 6-6

Table 6–3. Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ...................................... 6-12

Table 6–4. Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions .......... 6-16

Table 6–5. Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram ..................................... 6-19

Table 6–6. I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions ......... 6-21

Table 6–7. Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions .......................... 6-22

Table 6–8. Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions ........................................ 6-23

Table 6–9. Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions ............... 6-24

Table 6–10. Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions ............... 6-25

Table 6–11. Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin

Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6-26

Table 7–1. Model 17i Replacement Parts .......................................................... 7-4

Table 7–2. Model 17i Cables .............................................................................. 7-6

Table 7–3. External Device Connection Components ........................................ 7-7

Table 7–4. Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections ............ 7-35

Table 7–5. Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections............... 7-35

Table 8–1. RS-232 DB Connector Pin Configurations ...................................... 8-14

Table 8–2. RS-485 DB Connector Pin Configuration ........................................ 8-14

Table 9–1. Cable Options .................................................................................... 9-3

Table 9–2. Color Codes for 25-Pin and 37-Pin Cables ....................................... 9-4

Table 9–3. Mounting Options ............................................................................. 9-5

Table B–1. C-Link Protocol Commands .............................................................. B-2

Model 17i Instruction Manual xvii

Tables

Table B–2. Averaging Times ............................................................................. B-12

Table B–3. Alarm Trigger Values ...................................................................... B-20

Table B–4. Record Output Formats ................................................................... B-24

Table B–5. Stream Time Values ....................................................................... B-28

Table B–6. Standard Ranges ............................................................................ B-34

Table B–7. Extended Ranges ............................................................................ B-34

Table B–8. Contrast Levels ............................................................................... B-38

Table B–9. Reply Termination Formats ............................................................ B-43

Table B–10. Allow Mode Command Values .................................................... B-45

Table B–11. Power Up Mode Values ................................................................ B-46

Table B–12. Analog Current Output Range Values .......................................... B-47

Table B–13. Analog Voltage Output Range Values ......................................... B-47

Table B–14. Default Output Assignment .......................................................... B-49

Table C–1. Read Coils for 17i ............................................................................. C-8

Table C–2. Read Registers for 17i ...................................................................... C-9

Table C–3. Write Coils for 17i .......................................................................... C-11

Table D–1. Operating Status for Model 17i ...................................................... D-7

Table D–2. Error Status for Model 17i .............................................................. D-7

xviii Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Chapter 1

Introduction

The Model 17i Chemiluminescence NH

3

Analyzer combines proven detection technology, easy to use menu-driven software, and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability. The Model 17i has the following features:

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

320 x 240 graphics display

Menu-driven software

Field programmable ranges

User-selectable single/dual/auto range modes

Multiple user-defined analog outputs

Analog input options

High sensitivity

Fast response time

●

●

●

●

Linearity through all ranges

Independent NO-NO

2

-NO x

-NH

3

-N t

ranges

Replaceable NO

2

and NH

3

converter core assembly

User-selectable digital input/output capabilities

●

●

●

●

Standard communications features include RS232/485 and Ethernet

C-Link, MODBUS, Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen), and streaming data protocols

For details of the analyzer’s principle of operation and product specifications, see the following topics:

“ Principle of Operation ” on page 1-2

“ Specifications ” on page 1-3

Model 17i Instruction Manual 1-1

Introduction

Principle of Operation

Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this NH

3

analyzer. We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality, performance, and workmanship. Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer. For more information on servicing, see Chapter 7, “ Servicing ”.

Principle of

Operation

The Model 17i uses the light producing reaction of nitric oxide (NO) with ozone (O

3

) as its basic principle. Specifically:

NO

2



NO

N H

3



NO

NO + O

3



NO

2

+

O

2

+ h



The sample is drawn into the Model 17i by an external pump. After it reaches the reaction chamber, it mixes with ozone, which is generated by the internal ozonator. The last chemical reaction above then takes place.

This reaction produces a characteristic luminescence with intensity proportional to the concentration of NO. Specifically, light emission results when electronically excited NO

2

molecules decay to lower energy states.

The light emission is detected by a photomultiplier tube, which in turn generates a proportional electronic signal. The electronic signal is processed by the microcomputer into a NO concentration reading ( Figure 1–1 ).

To measure the NO x

(NO + NO

2

) concentration, NO

2

is transformed to

NO prior to reaching the reaction chamber. This transformation takes place in a molybdenum converter heated to approximately 325 °C. Upon reaching the reaction chamber, the converted molecules along with the original NO molecules react with ozone. The resulting signal represents the

NO x

reading.

To measure the N t

(NO + NO

2

+ NH

3

) concentration, both the NO

2

and

NH

3

are transformed to NO prior to reaching the reaction chamber. This transformation takes place in a stainless steel converter heated to approximately 750 °C. Upon reaching the reaction chamber, the converted molecules along with the original NO molecules react with ozone. The resulting signal represents the N t

(N

TOTAL

) reading.

The NO

2

concentration is determined by subtracting the signal obtained in the NO mode from the signal obtained in the NO x

mode.

NO x

– NO = NO

2

1-2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Introduction

Specifications

The NH

3

concentration is determined by subtracting the signal obtained in the NO x

mode from the signal obtained in the N t

mode.

N t

– NO x

= NH

3

The Model 17i outputs NO, NO

2

, NO

X

, NH

3

, and N t

concentrations to the front panel display and NO, NO

X

, and NH

3

, concentrations to the analog outputs and logged data by default (the other concentrations may be added by the user), and also makes the data available over the serial or

Ethernet connection.

Figure 1–1. Model 17i Flow Schematic

Specifications

Table 1–1 lists the specifications for the Model 17i.

Table 1–1. Model 17i Specifications

Preset ranges

Extended ranges

Custom ranges

Zero roise

Lower detectable limit

0-0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 ppm

0-0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30 mg/m 3

0-0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 ppm

0-0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 150 mg/m

3

0-0.05 to 20 ppm (0-0.2 to 100 ppm in extended ranges)

0-0.1 to 30 mg/m

3

(0-0.5 to 150 mg/m

3

in extended ranges)

0.5 ppb RMS (120 second averaging time)

1 ppb

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual 1-3

Introduction

Specifications

1-4 Model 17i Instruction Manual

Zero drift (24-hour) 1 ppb

Span drift (24-hour) 1% of full-scale

Response time (0-90%) 120 seconds (10 second averaging time)

Linearity 1% of full-scale

Sample flow rate

Operating temperature

Power requirements

Physical dimensions

(each)

16.75” (W) X 8.62” (H) X 23” (D)

Weight (analyzer module) Approximately 60 lbs. (analyzer, including external pump)

Approximately 29 lbs. (converter)

Analog outputs 6 voltage outputs; 0–100 mV, 1, 5, 10 V (User selectable), 5% of full-scale over/under range, 12 bit resolution, user programmable

Digital outputs

600 cc/min.

15–

35 °

C (may be safely operated over the 5–

45 °

C

)*

100 VAC @ 50/60 Hz

115 VAC @ 50/60 Hz

220–240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz

300 Watts (analyzer)

600 Watts (converter)

Digital inputs

Serial Ports

Ethernet connection

1 power fail relay Form C, 10 digital relays Form A, user selectable alarm output, relay logic, 100 mA @ 200 VDC

16 digital inputs, user select programmable, TTL level, pulled high

1 RS-232 or RS-485 with two connectors, baud rate 1200–

115200, Protocols: C-Link, MODBUS, Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen), and streaming data (all user selectable)

RJ45 connector for 10Mbs Ethernet connection, static or dynamic TCP/IP addressing

*In non-condensing environments. Performance specifications based on operation in 15–35 °C range.


Chapter 2

Installation

Installing the Model 17i includes lifting the instrument, unpacking and inspection, connecting sample, zero, span, and exhaust lines, and attaching analog outputs to a recording device. The installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the “ Calibration ”chapter of this manual.

This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures:

●

“ Lifting ” on page 2-1

●

●

●

●

“ Unpacking and Inspection ” on page 2-1

“ Setup Procedure ” on page 2-2

“ Connecting External Devices ” on page 2-6

“ Startup ” on page 2-11

Lifting

When lifting the instrument, use procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object, such as, bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright. Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit. Although one person can lift the unit, it is desirable to have two persons lifting, one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear.

Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings. ▲

Unpacking and

Inspection

The Model 17i is shipped complete in multiple containers. If there is obvious damage to any of the shipping containers when you receive the instrument, notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection. The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment.

Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument.

1. Remove the two modules from the shipping containers and set them on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear of the analyzer and converter modules.


Installation

Setup Procedure

2. Remove the covers to expose the internal components.

3. Remove the packing material in the analyzer ( Figure 2–1 ).

Remove Packing

(2 pieces)

Remove Packing

(2 pieces)

Units without Optional I/O Board

Units with Optional I/O Board

Figure 2–1. Remove the Packing Material

4. Check for possible damage during shipment.

5. Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached.

6. Re-install the covers.

7. Remove any protective plastic material from the case exteriors.

8. Remove the external pump from its shipping container and place next to the instrument.

Setup Procedure

Use the following procedure to setup the instrument:

1. Connect the sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel

( Figure 2–2 ). Ensure that the sample line is not contaminated by dirty, wet, or incompatible materials. All tubing should be constructed of

PFA Teflon®, 316 stainless steel, borosilicate glass, or similar tubing, with an OD of 1/4-inch and a minimum ID of 1/8-inch. The length of the tubing should be less than 10 feet.


Installation

Setup Procedure


Figure 2–2. Model 17i and Converter Module Rear Panels

Note Gas must be delivered to the instrument free of particulates. It may be necessary to use the Teflon particulate filter as described in “ Teflon

Particulate Filter ” on page 9-2 . ▲

Gas must be delivered to the instrument at atmospheric pressure. It may be necessary to use an atmospheric bypass plumbing arrangement as shown in

Figure 2–3 if gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure. ▲


Installation

Setup Procedure

SAMPLE

Instrument Bulkhead

Vent to Exhaust Line at

Atmospheric Pressure

Input Gas Line

Figure 2–3. Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing

2. Connect the air dryer to the DRY AIR bulkhead of the analyzer module.

3. Connect the pump vacuum port (inlet, stainless steel fitting) to the

EXHAUST bulkhead ( Figure 2–4 ). The exhaust line should be 1/4inch OD with a minimum ID of 1/8-inch. The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet. Verify that there is no restriction in this line.

4. Connect the pump exhaust port to a suitable vent. The exhaust stream will contain significant concentrations of ozone and oxides of nitrogen.

The length of the exhaust line should be less than 10 feet.

CAUTION Ozone is present in the exhaust, therefore, the exhaust should be plumbed to a suitable vent. ▲


Installation

Setup Procedure


Figure 2–4. Twin-Head Vacuum Pump Installation

5. Connect the NO OUT, NO x

OUT, and N t

OUT bulkheads on the converter module rear panel to the NO IN, NO x

IN, and N t

IN bulkheads on the analyzer module rear panel using 1/4-inch OD

Teflon tubing.

6. Connect a suitable recording device to the rear panel connector. For detailed information about connecting to the instrument, refer to:

“ Connecting External Devices ” on page 2-6

“ External Device Connection Components ” on page 7-7

“ Terminal Block and Cable Kits ” on page 9-3

“ Instrument Controls Menu ” on page 3-25

For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection, refer to

“ Analog Output Testing ” on page 7-33 .

7. Connect the communication cable from analyzer to converter module.

8. Plug the analyzer and converter into outlets of the appropriate voltage and frequency.

WARNING The Model 17i is supplied with three-wire grounding cords.

Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated. ▲


Installation

Connecting External Devices

Connecting

External Devices

Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries instruments.

These connection options include:

●

●

Individual terminal board PCB assemblies

Terminal block and cable kits (optional)

●

Individual cables (optional)

For detailed information on the optional connection components, refer to the “ Optional Equipment ” chapter. For associated part numbers, refer to

“ External Device Connection Components ” on page 7-7 .

Terminal Board PCB

Assemblies

The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries instruments:

●

●

●

I/O terminal board PCB assembly, 37 pin (standard)

D/O terminal board PCB assembly, 37 pin (standard)

25-pin terminal board PCB assembly, (included with optional I/O

Expansion Board)

I/O Terminal Board

Figure 2–5 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie-down and spacer. Table 2–1 identifies the connector pins and associated signals.

Note All of the I/O available in the instrument are not brought out on this terminal board, if more I/O is desired, an alternative means of connection is required. ▲


Installation


See Detail “B”

See Detail “A”

Component Side Viewed from Top of Board

Assembled Connector

Figure 2–5. I/O Terminal Board Views

Table 2–1. I/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions

Detail “A”

Pin Signal Description

1 Analog1


2 Analog Power_Fail_COM

3 Analog2

4 Analog TTL_Input1

5 Analog3

6 Analog TTL_Input3

7 Analog4

8 Analog ground

9 Analog5

10 Analog ground

11 Analog6

12 Analog ground

20

22

Digital ground

TTL_Input6

23 TTL_Input7

24 Digital ground

Detail “B”


Installation


D/O Terminal Board

See Detail “A”

Figure 2–6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable to the terminal board using the included tie-down and spacer. Table 2–2 identifies the connector pins and associated signals.

See Detail “B”


Detail “A” Detail “B”

Assembled Connector

Figure 2–6. D/O Terminal Board Views

Table 2–2. D/O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions

Pin Signal Description Pin Signal Description


10 Relay5_ContactB 22 +24V


Installation



12 Relay6_ContactB 24 +24V

25-Pin Terminal Board

See Detail “A”

The 25-pin terminal board is included with the optional I/O Expansion

Board.

See Detail “B”


Detail “A”

Assembled Connector

Figure 2–7. 25-Pin Terminal Board Views

Table 2–3. 25-Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions


1 IOut1


Detail “B

3 IOut2

5 IOut3

7 IOut4

9 IOut5


Installation



10 Isolated 22 Analog_In8

11 IOut6 23 Ground

12 Isolated 24 Ground



Installation

Startup

Startup

Use the following procedure when starting the instrument.

1. Plug the sample pump, analyzer, and converter modules into an appropriate AC outlet.

2. Turn the analyzer module and the converter module ON.

3. Allow 90 minutes for the instrument to stabilize.

Note it is best to turn the ozonator on and let the instrument run overnight before calibration in order to obtain the most accurate information. ▲

4. Set instrument parameters such as operating ranges and averaging times to appropriate settings. For more information about instrument parameters, see the “ Operation ” chapter.

5. Before beginning the actual monitoring, perform a multipoint calibration as described in the “ Calibration ” chapter.



Chapter 3

Operation

This chapter describes the front panel display, front panel pushbuttons, and menu-driven software. For details, see the following topics:

●

●

“ Display ” on page 3-1

“ Pushbuttons ” on page 3-2

●

●

●

●

“ Software Overview ” on page 3-4

“ Range Menu ” on page 3-8

“ Averaging Time ” on page 3-16

“ Calibration Factors Menu ” on page 3-17

●

●

●

●

●

●

“ Calibration Menu ” on page 3-20

“ Instrument Controls Menu ” on page 3-25

“ Diagnostics Menu ” on page 3-55

“ Alarms Menu ” on page 3-61

“ Service Menu ” on page 3-71

“ Password Menu ” on page 3-84

Display

The 320 x 240 graphics liquid-crystal display (LCD) shows the sample concentrations, instrument parameters, instrument controls, help, and error messages. Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time. For these menus, use and to move the cursor up and down to each item.


Operation

Pushbuttons

Figure 3–1. Front Panel Display

CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks, do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes, wash it off immediately using soap and water. ▲

Pushbuttons

The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens/menus.


Figure 3–2. Front Panel Pushbuttons



Operation

Pushbuttons

Table 3–1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions.

Table 3–1. Front Panel Pushbuttons

Key Name

= Soft Keys

= Run

= Menu

= Help

= Enter

= Up, Down

= Left, Right

Function

The (soft keys) are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user-selectable menu screens. For more information on processing soft keys, see “Soft Keys” below

The is used to display the Run screen. The Run screen normally displays the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t concentrations.

The is used to display the Main Menu when in the

Run screen, or back up one level in the menu system. For more information about the Main Menu, see “Main Menu” later in this chapter.

The is context-sensitive, that is, it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed. Press for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu. Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easily distinguish them from the operating screens. To exit a help screen, press

to return to the previous screen, or return to the Run screen.

to

or

The four arrow pushbuttons ( , ,

) move the cursor up, down, left, and right or change values and states in specific screens.

, and

The is used to select a menu item, accept/set/save a change, and/or toggle on/off functions.

Soft Keys

The Soft Keys are multi-functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function at any moment. The function of the soft keys allows immediate access to the menu structure and most often used menus and screens. They are located directly underneath the display and as the keys' functions change this is indicated by user-defined labels in the lower part of the display, so that the user knows what the keys are to be used for.

To change a soft key, place the menu cursor “>” on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set. Press followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right-arrow key. The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration for the new label.


Operation

Software Overview

Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys. If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned, the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right-arrow-soft key combinations. All items under the

Service menu (including the menu itself) cannot be assigned soft keys. ▲

EDIT SOFT KEY PROMPT:

CURRENTLY:RANGE

R ANGE

A BCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP

OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE

RANGE AVG DIAGS ALARM

Software

Overview

The Model 17i utilizes the menu-driven software as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3–3 . The Power-Up screen, shown at the top of the flowchart, is displayed each time the instrument is turned on. This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self-checks.

After the warm-up period, the Run screen is automatically displayed. The

Run screen is the normal operating screen. It displays the NO, NO

2

, NO x

,

NH

3

, and N t

concentrations, depending on operating mode. From the Run screen, the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing . The Main

Menu contains a list of submenus. Each submenu contains related instrument settings. This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail. Refer to the appropriate sections for more information.


Operation

Software Overview


Figure 3–3. Flowchart of Menu-Driven Software


Operation

Software Overview

Power-Up Screen

The Power-Up screen is displayed on power up of the Model 17i. The Self-

Test is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are performed.

Please wait while booting...

Run Screen

The Run screen displays the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentrations.

The status bar displays optional zero/span solenoid valves, if installed, time, and alarm status. The word “SAMPLE” on the bottom left of the display indicates the analyzer has the span/zero valve option and is in “SAMPLE” mode. Other modes appear in the same area of the display as “ZERO” or

“SPAN”. For more information about the optional solenoid valves, see

Chapter 9, “ Optional Equipment ”.

When operating in dual or auto range mode two sets of coefficients are used to calculate the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

“High” and “Low” concentrations. Also, two averaging times are used—one for each range.

The title bar indicates which range concentrations are displayed. The words

“LOW RANGE CONCENTRATION” on the top of the display indicates that the low concentration is displayed. In dual range mode, pressing the

and arrows will toggle between high and low concentrations.

The example below shows the Run screen in single range mode.



Operation

Software Overview

X CONCENTRATION W

NO 2.6

PPB

28.7

PPB

NO

2

1.1

PPB

NO x

3.7

PPB

NH

3

0.3

PPB

N t

4.0

PPB

29.2

PPB

SAMPLE 12:34 ALARM x


Main Menu

The Main Menu contains a number of submenus. Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function. The concentration appears above the main menu and submenus in every screen. The SERVICE menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” later in this chapter.

●

●

●

Use

Press

Press screen.

and to move the cursor up and down.

to select a choice.

to return to the Main Menu or to return to the Run

XXLO W CONCENTRATION XXLO W

NO 2.6 PPB

NO2 1.1 PPB

NOx 2.2 PPB

NH3 2.2 PPB

Nt 2.2 PPB x SAMPLE 12:34 ALARM x

MAIN MENU:

>RANGE

AVERAGING TIME

CALIBRATION FACTORS

CALIBRATION

INSTRUMENT CONTROLS




DIAGNOSTICS

ALARMS

SERVICE

PASSWORD


Operation

Range Menu

Range Menu

The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units, NO-NO

2

-

NO x

-NH

3

-N t

ranges, and to set the custom ranges. The screens below show the range menu in single range mode and dual/auto range modes. The only difference between the screens are the words “HI” and “LO” to indicate which range is displayed. For more information about the single, dual and auto range modes, see “ Single Range Mode ”, “ Dual Range Mode ”, and

“ Auto Range Mode ” below.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Range

RANGE:

>GAS UNITS PPB

NO RANGE 500

NO2 RANGE 500

NOx RANGE 500

NH3 RANGE 500




RANGE:

>GAS UNITS PPB

HI NO RANGE 500

LO NO RANGE 50

HI NO2 RANGE 500

LO NO2 RANGE 50 


NT RANGE 500 HI NOx RANGE 500

SET CUSTOM RANGES LO NOx RANGE 50

HI NH3 RANGE 500

LO NH3 RANGE 50

HI Nt RANGE 500

LO Nt RANGE 50

SET CUSTOM RANGES

Single Range Mode

In the single range mode, while in NO/NO x

/N t

mode, the NO, NO x

,

NO

2

, N t

, and NH

3

channels each have one range, one averaging time, and one span coefficient.

By default, the four analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3–4 . See Table 3–2 for channels and pin connections. Single range mode may be selected from the “ Range Mode

Select ” on page 3-72 .


Operation

Range Menu

Figure 3–4. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Single Range Mode

Table 3–2. Default Analog Outputs in Single Range Mode

Channel

1

Connector Pin

14

2 33

3 15

4 34

5 17

6 36

Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37

I/O Terminal Pin

1

3

5

7

9

11

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

Description

NO Analog Output

NO x

Analog Output

NO

2

Analog Output

NH

3

Analog Output

None

None

Signal Ground

Note All channels are user definable. If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration, the default selections my not apply. ▲

Dual Range Mode

In the dual range mode while in NO/NO x

/N t

mode, there are two independent NO x

analog outputs and two independent NH

3

analog outputs. These are labeled simply as the “High Range” and the “Low

Range”. Each channel has its own analog output range, averaging time, and span coefficient.

This enables the sample concentration reading to be sent to the analog outputs at two different ranges. For example, the low NO x

analog output can be set to output concentrations from 0 to 50 ppb and the high NO x analog output set to output concentrations from 0 to 500 ppb.


Operation

Range Menu

In addition to each channel having two ranges, each channel has two span coefficients. There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately. This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another. For example, the low NO x

range is set to 0–50 ppb and the high

NO x

range is set to 0–20,000 ppb.

By default, in the dual range mode, the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3–5 . See Table 3–3 for channels and pin connections. Dual range mode may be selected from the “ Range

Mode Select ” on page 3-72 .


Figure 3–5. Pin-Out of Rear Panel Connector in Dual Range Mode

Table 3–3. Default Analog Outputs in Dual Range Mode

Channel Connector Pin I/O Terminal Pin

1 14 1

2 33 3

3 15 5

4 34 7

5 17 9

6 36 11

Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12

Description

NO x

Low Range

NO x

High Range

NH

3

Low Range

NH

3

High Range

None

None

Signal Ground



Operation

Range Menu

Auto Range Mode

While in the NO/NO x

/N t

mode, the auto range mode switches the NO x and NH

3

analog outputs between high and low ranges, depending on the concentration level. The high and low ranges are defined in the Range menu.

For example, suppose the low range is set to 500 ppb and the high range is set to 1000 ppb ( Figure 3–6 ). Sample concentrations below 500 ppb are presented to the low ranges analog outputs and sample concentrations above 500 ppb are presented to the high ranges analog outputs. When the low range is active, the status output is at 0 volts. When the high range is active, the status output is at half of full-scale.

When the high ranges are active, the NH

3

concentration must drop to 85% of the low NH

3

range for the low ranges to become active.

In addition to each channel having two ranges, each channel has two span coefficients. There are two span coefficients so that each range can be calibrated separately. This is necessary if the two ranges are not close to one another. For example, the low NH

3

range is set to 0–50 ppb and the high

NH

3

range is set to 0–20,000 ppb.


Figure 3–6. Analog Output in Auto Range Mode


Operation

Range Menu

By default, in the auto range mode, the analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3–7 . See Table 3–4 for channels and pin connections. Auto range mode may be selected from the “ Range

Mode Select ” on page 3-72 .


Figure 3–7. Pin-Out of Rear Connector in Auto Range Mode

Table 3–4. Default Analog Outputs in Auto Range Mode

Channel Connector Pin I/O Terminal Pin

1 14 1

2 33 3

Description

NO x

Analog Output

3 15 5

4 34 7 half-scale = high range zero scale = low range

NH

3

Analog Output

5 17 9 half-scale = high range zero scale = low range

None

Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Signal Ground



Operation

Range Menu

Gas Units

The Gas Units screen defines how the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t concentration readings are expressed. Gas units of parts per billion (ppb), parts per million (ppm), micrograms per cubic meter (μg/m

3

), or milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m

3

) are available. The μg/m

3

and mg/m

3 gas concentration modes are calculated using a standard pressure of 760 mmHg and a standard temperature of 20 °C.

When switching the selected units from ppb or ppm to μg/m 3 or mg/m 3 , the analog ranges all default to the highest range in that mode. For example, when switching from mg/m 3 to ppm, all the ranges default to 20 ppm. Therefore, whenever you change units, you should also check the range settings.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Range > Gas Units.

Note If the units change from ppb/ppm to μg/m 3 /mg/m 3 or vice versa, the instrument should be re-calibrated, particularly if the user’s standard temperature is different from 20 °C. A display warning will appear that ranges will be defaulted and calibration parameters reset. ▲

GAS UNITS:

CURRENTLY: PPB

SET TO: UG/M3 ?

AND SET RANGES AND CAL TO X

DEFAULT SETTINGS XXXXXXXXXX

 CHANGE VALUE  SAVE


NO, NO

2

, NO

x

, NH

3

, and N

t

Ranges

The NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Ranges screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs. For example, a NO

2

range of 0–

50 ppb restricts the NO

2

analog output to concentrations between 0 and

50 ppb.

The display shows the current NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, or N t

range. The next line of the display is used to change the range. The range screen is similar for the single, dual, and auto range modes. The only difference between the screens are the words “High” and “Low” to indicate which range is displayed. The example below shows the NO range screen in single mode. For more information about the dual and auto range modes, see

“ Single Range Mode ”, “ Dual Range Mode ”, and “ Auto Range Mode ” earlier in this chapter.


Operation

Range Menu

Table 3–5 lists the available operating ranges. Table 3–6 lists the extended ranges. When switching from standard to extended ranges, the PMT voltage must be readjusted. For more information about readjusting the

PMT voltage, see Chapter 7, “ Servicing ”.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Range > NO, NO2, NOx, NH3, or Nt

Range.

NO RANGE:

CURRENTLY: 50

SET TO: 100 ?

 CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Table 3–5. Standard Ranges

ppb ppm μgm

3 mgm

3

100 0.10 200 0.2

200 0.20 500 0.5

1,000 1.00 2,000 2.0

2,000 2.00 5,000 5.0

5,000 5.00 10,000 10.0

10,000 10.00 20,000 20.0

20,000 20.00 30,000 30.0

C1 C1 C1 C1

C2 C2 C2 C2

C3 C3 C3 C3


Operation

Range Menu

Table 3–6. Extended Ranges

ppb ppm μgm

3 mgm

3

200 0.2 500 0.5

1,000 1 2,000 2

2,000 2 5,000 5

5,000 5 10,000 10

10,000 10 20,000 20

20,000 20 50,000 50

50,000 50 100,000 100

100,000 100 150,000 150

C1 C1 C1 C1

C2 C2 C2 C2

C3 C3 C3 C3

C1, C2, and C3 are custom ranges. For more information about custom ranges, see “ Set Custom Ranges ” below.

Set Custom Ranges

The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges: C1, C2, and C3.

Custom ranges are user-defined ranges. In the standard range mode, any value between 50 ppb (0.05 ppm) and 20,000 ppb (20 ppm) can be specified as a range. In the μg/m

3

(mg/m

3

) mode, any value between 100

μg/m

3

(0.1 mg/m

3

) and 30,000 μg/m

3

(30 mg/m

3

) can be specified as a range. In the extended range mode, any value between 200 ppb (0.20 ppm) and 100,000 ppb (100 ppm) can be specified as a range. In the μg/m

3

(mg/m

3

) mode, any value between 500 μg/m

3

(0.5 mg/m

3

) and 150,000

μg/m

3

(150 mg/m

3

) can be specified as a range.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Range > Set Custom Ranges.

CUSTOM RANGES:

>CUSTOM RANGE 1 55.6

CUSTOM RANGE 2 75.0

CUSTOM RANGE 3 125.0



Operation

Averaging Time

Custom Ranges

The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges.

The display shows the current custom range. The next line of the display is used to set the range. To use the custom full-scale range, be sure to select it

(Custom range 1, 2, or 3) in the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, or N t

Ranges screen. For more information about selecting ranges, see “ NO, NO2,

NOx, NH3, and Nt Ranges ” above.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Range > Set Custom Ranges > Custom

range 1, 2, or 3.

CUSTOM RANGE 1:

CURRENTLY: 55.6

SET TO: 000055.7 ?



MOVE CURSOR



Averaging Time

The Averaging Time defines a time period (10 to 300 seconds) over which

NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

measurements are taken. The average concentration of the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

readings are calculated for that time period. The front panel display and analog outputs are updated every 10 seconds for averaging times between 10 and 300 seconds.

An averaging time of 10 seconds, for example, means that the average concentration of the last 10 seconds will be output at each update. An averaging time of 300 seconds means that the moving average concentration of the last 300 seconds will be output at each update.

Therefore, the lower the averaging time the faster the front panel display and analog outputs respond to concentration changes. Longer averaging times are typically used to smooth output data.

The Averaging Time screen for the single range mode is shown below. In the dual and auto range modes, an Averaging Time Menu is displayed before the averaging time screens. This additional menu is needed because the dual and auto range modes have two averaging times (high and low).

The Averaging Time screen functions the same way in the single, dual, and auto range modes. The following averaging times are available: 10, 20, 30,

60, 90, 120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds. Additional averaging times are available in NO and NO x

modes: 1, 2, and 5 seconds. For more information about the manual mode, see “ Auto/Manual Mode ” later in this chapter.


Operation

Calibration Factors Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Averaging Time.

AVERAGING TIME:

CURRENTLY: 30 SEC

SET TO: 10 SEC ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Calibration Factors

Menu

Calibration factors are used to correct the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t concentrations readings that the instrument generates using its own internal calibration data. The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors. The screens below show the calibration factors menu in single mode and dual/auto range modes. The only difference between the screens are the words “HI” and “LO” to indicate which range is displayed.

Normally, the instrument is calibrated automatically using the Calibration menu described in “ Calibration Menu ” later in this chapter. However, the instrument can also be calibrated manually using the Calibration Factors menu.

To manually calibrate the instrument, see “ NO, NOx, and Nt

Backgrounds”and “ NO, NO2, NOx, NH3, and Nt Coefficients ” below for more information.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors.

CALIBRATION FACTORS:

>NO BKG 0.0

NOx BKG 0.0

Nt BKG 0.0

NO COEF 1.000

NO2 COEF 1 1.000




CALIBRATION FACTORS:

>NO BKG 0.0

NOx BKG 0.0

Nt BKG 0.0

HI NO COEF 1.000

HI NO2 COEF 1 1.000




NO2 COEF 2 1.000 HI NO2 COEF 2 1.000

NOx COEF 1.000 HI NOx COEF 1.000

NH3 COEF 1.000 HI NH3 COEF 1.000

Nt COEF 1.000 HI Nt COEF 1.000

RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS LO NO COEF 1.000

LO NO2 COEF 1 1.000

LO NO2 COEF 2 1.000

LO NOx COEF 1.000

LO NH3 COEF 1.000

LO Nt COEF 1.000

RESET USER CAL DEFAULTS


Operation

Calibration Factors Menu

NO, NO

x

, and N

t

Backgrounds

The NO, NO x

, and N t

background corrections are determined during zero calibration. The NO background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NO channel while sampling zero air. The NO x

background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the NO x

channel while sampling zero air. The N t

background is the amount of signal read by the analyzer in the N t

channel while sampling zero air. Although the background is expressed in terms of concentration, the background signal is actually the combination of electrical offsets, PMT dark currents, and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence. Before the analyzer sets the

NO, NO x

, and N t

readings to zero, it stores these values as the NO, NO x

, and N t

background corrections, respectively. The NO

2

and NH

3 background corrections are determined from the NO, NO x

, and N t background corrections and are not displayed. The background corrections are typically below 15 ppb.

The NO, NO x

, and N t

Background screens are used to perform a manual zero calibration of the instrument. Before performing a zero calibration, allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable readings are obtained. The

NO channel should be calibrated first. The NO, NO x

, and N t

Background screens operate the same way. Therefore, the following description of the

NO background applies to the NO x

and N t

background screens as well.

The first line of the display shows the current NO reading. The second line of the display shows the NO background correction that will be stored in memory. The NO background correction is a value, expressed in the current gas units, that is subtracted from the NO reading to produce the

NO reading that is displayed.

In the example below, the analyzer displays 5.2 ppb of NO while sampling zero air. A background correction of 0.0 ppb means that 0 ppb is being subtracted from the NO concentration being displayed. Therefore, the background correction must be increased to 5.2 ppb in order for the NO reading to be at 0 ppb, i.e., a NO reading of 5.2 ppb minus a NO background reading of 5.2 ppb gives the corrected NO reading of 0 ppb.

To set the NO reading in the example below to zero, use to increment the NO background correction to 5.2 ppb. As the NO background correction is increased, the NO concentration is decreased.

Note that at this point, pressing and however, has no affect on the analog outputs or the stored NO background correction of 0.0 ppb.

A question mark following both the NO reading and the NO background correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To escape this screen without saving any changes, press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to the Run screen. Press

to return

to actually set the NO reading to 0 ppb and


Operation

Calibration Factors Menu store the new background correction of 5.2 ppb. Then the question mark prompt beside the NO reading disappears.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > NO, NOx, or Nt

BKG.

NO BACKGROUND:

NO: 5.2

SET BKG TO: 0.00

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE


NO, NO

2

, NO

x

, NH

3

, and N

t

Coefficients

The NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

span coefficients are usually calculated by the instrument processor during calibration. The span coefficients are used to correct the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

readings. The NO, NO x

, and N t

span coefficients normally has a value near 1.000. The NO

2

span coefficient normally has a value between 0.95 and 1.050.

It should be noted that the NO

2

span coefficient has two coefficient values.

“NO2 COEF 1” is the NO

2

span coefficient factor for the low temperature converter, while “NO2 COEF 2” is the NO

2

span factor coefficient for the high temperature converter. The normal values are near 1.000.

The NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Coefficient screens allow the NO,

NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

span coefficients to be manually changed while sampling span gas of known concentration. The NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Coefficient screens operate the same way. Therefore, the following description of the NO coefficient screen applies to the NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

coefficient screens as well.

The display shows the current NO concentration reading. The next line of the display shows the NO span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the NO concentration. Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed, the current NO concentration reading on the above line also changes. However, no real changes are made to the value stored in memory until is pressed. Only proposed changes, as indicated by a question mark prompt, are displayed until is pressed.

In dual or auto range modes, “HIGH” or “LOW” is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low coefficient. The example below shows the coefficient screen in single range mode.


Operation

Calibration Menu

Note The concentration value will show “ERROR” if the measured concentration is not a valid span value (either higher than the selected range, or 0 or lower). ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > NO, NO2, NOx,

NH3, or Nt Coef.

NO COEFFICIENT:

NO: 51.4

SET COEF TO: 1.000

 INC/DEC

 SAVE VALUE


Reset User Calibration

Default

The Reset User Calibration Default screen allows the user to reset the calibration configuration values to factory defaults.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration Factors > Reset User Cal

Defaults.

RESTORE DEFAULT CAL:

 RESTORE



 RESTORE

ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO?

x

PRESS



TO CONFIRM RESTORE


Calibration Menu

The Calibration menu is used to calibrate the background of NO, NO x

, and N t

, and the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

channels. The screens below show the calibration menu in single mode and dual/auto range modes. The zero/span check item is visible only if the zero/span option is installed.

The calibration procedure is the same in dual, auto, or single range, however, there are two sets of gas coefficients in dual or auto range (i.e. low and high coefficients). This enables each range to be calibrated separately.

When calibrating the instrument in dual or auto range, be sure to use a low span gas to calibrate the low range and a high span gas to calibrate the high range.


Operation

Calibration Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration.

CALIBRATION:

>CAL NO BACKGROUND

CAL NOx BACKGROUND

CAL Nt BACKGROUND

CAL NO COEFFICIENT

CAL NO2 COEFFICIENT




CALIBRATION:

>CAL NO BACKGROUND

CAL NOx BACKGROUND

CAL Nt BACKGROUND

CAL HI NO COEFFICIENT

CAL HI NO2 COEFFICIENT




CAL NOx COEFFICIENT CAL HI NOx COEFFICIENT

CAL NH3 COEFFICIENT CAL HI NH3 COEFFICIENT

CAL Nt COEFFICIENT CAL HI Nt COEFFICIENT

ZERO/SPAN CHECK CAL LO NO COEFFICIENT

CAL LO NO2 COEFFICIENT

CAL LO NOx COEFFICIENT

CAL LO NH3 COEFFICIENT

CAL LO Nt COEFFICIENT

ZERO/SPAN CHECK

Calibrate NO, NO

x

and N

t

Backgrounds

The Calibrate NO, NO x

, and N t

Background screens are used to adjust the background, or perform a “zero calibration”. Be sure the analyzer samples zero air until the readings stabilize. The display shows the current NO,

NO x

or N t

reading.

It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating. The longer the averaging time, the more accurate the calibration will be. To be most accurate, use the 300-second averaging time. For more information about calibration, see Chapter 4, “ Calibration ”.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Calibrate NO, NOx, or Nt

Background.

NO BACKGROUND:

NO: 1.2

CURRENTLY: 0.00 ?



SET NO TO ZERO



Operation

Calibration Menu

Calibrate NO, NO

2

, NO

x

,

NH

3

, and N

t

Coefficients

The Calibrate NO Coefficient screen is used to adjust the NO span concentration while sampling span gas of known concentration. All calibration screens operate the same way. Therefore, the following description of the NO calibration screen applies to the NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

calibration screens as well.

The display shows the current NO concentration reading. The next line of the display is where the span calibration gas concentration is entered.

It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating. The longer the averaging time, the more accurate the calibration will be. To be most accurate, use the 300-second averaging time. In dual or auto range modes,

“HIGH” or “LOW” is displayed to indicate the calibration of the high or low range coefficient. For more information about calibration, see Chapter

4, “ Calibration ”.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Cal NO, NO2, NOx, NH3

or Nt Coefficient.

CALIBRATE NO:

NO: 25.5

SPAN CONC: 000025.

0 ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Zero/Span Check

The Zero/Span Check menu is available with the zero/span valve option. It is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span checks or adjustments. Total Duration Hr is the sum of zero, span, and purge duration minutes. Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected, and displayed if auto calibration is installed.

Note Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected, and displayed if auto calibration is installed and the instrument is in single range, manual mode. ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check.



Operation

Calibration Menu

ZERO/SPAN CHECK:

>NEXT TIME 01Jan05 12:00

PERIOD HR 24

TOTAL DURATION HR 2.5

ZERO DURATION MIN 30

SPAN DURATION MIN 30 


PURGE DURATION MIN 30

ZERO/SPAN AVG SEC 60

ZERO CAL RESET ON

SPAN CAL RESET OFF

ZERO/SPAN RATIO 1

Next Time

The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time of the zero/span check. Once the initial zero/span check is performed, the date and time of the next zero/span check is calculated and displayed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Next

Time.

NEXT DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2005 12:34

PRESS  TO EDIT


NEXT DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2005 12:34:56

SETTING: DAYS

 SET MONTHS



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Period Hours

The Zero/Span Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero/span checks. Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable. To turn the zero/span check off, set the period to 0.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Period

HR.

ZERO/SPAN PERIOD:

CURRENTLY: 024 HRS

SET TO: 02 5 HRS ?



MOVE CURSOR




Operation

Calibration Menu

Zero/Span/Purge

Duration Minutes

The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by the instrument. The span and purge duration screens look and function the same way as the zero duration screen, and are used to set how long the span gas and sample gas are sampled by the instrument. Durations between 0 and 99 minutes are acceptable. Each time a zero/span check occurs the zero check is done first, followed by the span check. To perform just a zero check, set the span and purge duration screen to 0 (off). The same applies to perform just a span or purge check.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check > Zero,

Span or Purge Duration Min.

ZERO DURATION:

CURRENTLY: 30 MIN

SET TO: 31 MIN ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Zero/Span Averaging

Time

The Zero/Span Averaging Time screen allows the user to adjust the zero/span averaging time. The zero/span averaging time is used by the analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check or calibration. The analyzer’s averaging time is used for all other functions.

The following averaging times are available: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60, 90,

120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds (in NO/NO x

/N t

mode only 10, 20, 30.

60, 90, 120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds are available).

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check >

Zero/Span Avg Sec.

ZERO/SPAN AVERAGING TIME:

CURRENTLY: 60 SEC

SET TO: 90 SEC ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Zero/Span Ratio

The Zero/Span Ratio screen is used to adjust the ratio of zeros to spans. For example, if this value is set to 1, a span check will follow every zero check.


Operation

Instrument Controls Menu

If this value is set to 3, there will be two zero checks between each zero/span check. This value may be set from 1 to 10, with 1 as default.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Calibration > Zero/Span Check >

Zero/Span Ratio.

ZERO/SPAN RATIO:

CURRENTLY: 1:1

SET TO: 2:1 ?

 CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Instrument Controls

Menu

●

The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items. The software controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions.

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls.

INSTRUMENT CONTROLS:

>OZONATOR

PMT SUPPLY

AUTO/MANUAL MODE

DATALOGGING SETTINGS

COMMUNICATION SETTINGS




I/O CONFIGURATION

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

PRESSURE COMPENSATION

SCREEN CONTRAST

SERVICE MODE

DATE/TIME


Ozonator

The Ozonator screen is used to turn the internal ozonator on or off. The display shows the status of the control line that turns the ozonator on or off. The next line of the display shows the user-specified ozonator setting.

Under most conditions, the control line status and ozonator set status are the same. However, as a safety precaution, the microprocessor can override the user-specified ozonator setting. This occurs only if the ozonator flow doesn’t indicate any flow or if the NO

2

converter temperature is below the minimum alarm limit. In this case, an alarm is activated and the ozonator is turned off. This is done to prevent the ozonator from overheating, which will result in permanent damage to the ozonator, or if the converter temperature drops below the minimum limit, which reduces the effectiveness of the ozone destruct.


Operation


It is possible, however, to override the ozonator shut-off due to converter temperature being out of range, by setting the ozonator safety “OFF” in the

“Service Menu”.

Note The ozonator must be “ON” to obtain NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and

N t

readings. As an additional safety precaution, a lit LED mounted on the measurement interface board indicates that the ozonator is on.

▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Ozonator.

OZONATOR:

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?



TOGGLE VALUE


PMT Supply

●

The PMT Supply screen is used to turn the PMT power supply on or off.

This is useful in a troubleshooting situation.

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > PMT Supply.

PMT SUPPLY:

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?



TOGGLE VALUE


Auto/Manual Mode

The Auto/Manual Mode screen allows selection of the automatic mode

(NO/NO x

/N t

), NO mode (manual NO), NO x

mode (manual NO x

) or N t mode (manual N t

). The auto cycle mode switches the three-mode solenoid valves automatically on a 10 second cycle so that NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentrations are determined. The manual NO mode places the

NO mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position. Therefore, only the NO concentration is determined. The manual NO x

mode placess the NO x

mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position. Therefore, only the

NO x

concentration is determined. The manual N t

mode places the N t mode solenoid valve into the open position and the other valves in the closed position. Therefore, only the N t

concentration is determined. In the


Operation

Instrument Controls Menu manual modes, additional averaging times of 1, 2, and 5 seconds are available from the Averaging Times screen.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Auto/Manual

Mode.

MODE:

CURRENTLY: MANUAL NO

SET TO: NO/NOx/Nt ?

 CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Datalogging Settings

The Datalogging Settings menu deals with datalogging.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Datalogging

Settings.

DATALOGGING SETTINGS:

>SELECT SREC/LREC SREC

VIEW LOGGED DATA

ERASE LOG

SELECT CONTENT

COMMIT CONTENT




RESET TO DEFAULT CONTENT

CONFIGURE DATALOGGING

Select SREC/LREC

The Select SREC/LREC is used to select short record or long record format for other operations in this menu.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Datalogging Settings

> Select SREC/LREC.

SELECT LOG TYPE:

CURRENTLY: SREC

SET TO: LREC ?

 TOGGLE VALUE



Operation


View Logged Data

The View Logged Data screen is used to select the start point to view the logged data by number of records or date and time.

●


> Select SREC or LREC > View Logged Data.

SELECT START POINT BY:

SET TO: # OF RECS

 CHANGE  ACCEPT


Number of Records

The Number of Records screen is used to select the starting point to display the number of records back to view.

SET # BACK FROM CURRENT:

000000 0

TOTAL LRECS: 20



MOVE CURSOR



The Record Display screen (read only) displays the selected records.

Time date flags

10:01 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:02 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:03 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:04 06/20/05 FC0088900



PGUP/DN



PAN L/R


Date and Time

The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data. For example, if “20 JUN 2005 10:00” is entered, then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time. If set to one minute logging, this would be at “20 JUN 2005 10:01”.


Operation


DATE AND TIME:

20 JUN 2005 10:00



CHG DAYS

 SET CURSOR TO MONTHS

 ACCEPT AS SHOWN


The Record Display screen (read only) displays the selected records.

Time date flags

10:01 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:02 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:03 06/20/05 FC0088900

10:04 06/20/05 FC0088900



PGUP/DN



PAN L/R


Erase Log

The Erase Log is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type

(not all short records and long records).

●


> Erase Log.

ERASE LREC LOG FILE DATA?

 ERASE



 ERASE


x

PRESS



TO CONFIRM ERASURE



Select Content

The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use and a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from.

Choices are Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board is installed). This is a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply. Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data, as the format of the stored data is changed.

●


> Select Content.


Operation


LREC FIELDS:

>FIELD 1 NO

FIELD 2 NOX

FIELD 3 NT

FIELD 4 PMTV

FIELD 5 INTT




Choose Item Type

The Choose Item Type submenu displays a list of data that can be loggd for the current field. Choices are Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board is installed).

●


> Select Content > Field 1-32.

DATA IN SREC FIELD 1:

>CONCENTRATIONS

OTHER MEASUREMENTS

ANALOG INPUTS


Note The ANALOG INPUTS item is only displayed if the I/O Expansion

Board option is installed. ▲

Concentrations

The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it.

Note that at this point, pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To change the selected record format and erase record log file data, see “ Commit Content ” below.

RANGE is visible only in auto range mode.

●


> Select Content > Select Field > Concentrations.


Operation


CONCENTRATIONS:

>NONE

NO <--

NO2

NOx

NH3 


Nt

LO NO

LO NO2

LO NOx

LO NH3

LO Nt

HI NO

HI NO2

HI NOx

HI NH3

HI Ht

RANGE

Other Measurements

The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected field item. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it. Items displayed are determined by the options installed. Note that at this point, pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To change the selected record format and erase record log file data, see “ Commit Content ” below.

●


> Select Content > Select Field > Other Measurements.

OTHER MEASUREMENTS:

>NONE

INT TEMP

CHAMBER TEMP

COOLER TEMP

NO2 CNV TEMP




EXT CNV TEMP

CHAMBER PRES

FLOW

PMT VOLTS

OZONATOR FLOW

CAPILRY TEMP


Operation


Analog Inputs

The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the output signal (none or analog inputs 1-8) that is tied to the selected field item. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it. Note that at this point, pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes. To change the selected record format and erase record log file data, see “ Commit Content ” below.

●


> Select Content > Select Field > Analog Inputs.

ANALOG INPUTS:

>NONE

ANALOG IN 1

ANALOG IN 2

ANALOG IN 3

ANALOG IN 4 


Commit Content

The Commit Content screen is used to save the selected output signal that is tied to the selected field item. If no changes have been made “NO

CHANGES TO RECORD LIST!” will appear. For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices, see “ Select

Content ” above.

●


> Commit Content.

CHANGE LREC DATA AND




COMMIT


CHANGE LREC DATA AND




COMMIT


x

PRESS  TO CONFIRM ERASURE


Reset to Default Content

The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging field items to default values. For more information about selecting the analog output signal group choices, see “ Select Content ” above.

●


> Reset to Default Content.


Operation


RESET LREC DATA AND




RESET


RESET LREC DATA AND




RESET


x

PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESET xx


Configure Datalogging

The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type.

●


> Configure Datalogging.

DATALOGGING SETTINGS:

>LOGGING PERIOD MIN 60

MEMORY ALLOCATION % 50

DATA TREATMENT AVG


Logging Period Min

The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the record format (srec or lrec). List of choices include: off, 1,

5, 15, 30, and 60 minutes (default).

●


> Configure Datalogging > Logging Period Min.

SET PERIOD FOR SREC:

CURRENTLY: 60 MIN

SET TO: OFF MIN



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Memory Allocation

Percent

The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of each record type for both short records and long records. Percentages between 0 and 100% are available in increments of 10. Changing this value results in log erasure for both short records and long records.


Operation


●


> Configure Datalogging > Memory Allocation %.

SET PERCENT LRECS:

CURRENTLY: 50%

SET TO: 60% ?



Data Treatment

The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type: whether the data should be averaged over the interval, the minimum or maximum measured during the interval, or the current value

(last value measured). Data treatment doesn’t apply to all data, just to the concentration measurement. All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval.

●


> Configure Datalogging > Data Treatment.

SET LREC DATA TYPE:

CURRENTLY: AVG

SET TO: CUR ?



Communication

Settings

The Communication Settings menu is used with communications control and configuration.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Communication

Settings.

COMMUNICATION SETTINGS:

>BAUD RATE

INSTRUMENT ID

COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

STREAMING DATA CONFIG

RS-232/RS-485 SELECTION 


TCP/IP SETTINGS


Operation


Baud Rate

The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS-232/RS-485 interface baud rate.

Baud rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and

115200 are available.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Communication

Settings > Baud Rate.

BAUD RATE:

CURRENTLY: 9600

SET TO: 19200 ?

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Instrument ID

The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID.

The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C-Link or

MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data. It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more of the same instruments are connected to one computer. Valid Instrument ID numbers are from 0 to

127. The Model 17i has a default Instrument ID of 17. For more information about the Instrument ID, see Appendix B “ C-Link Protocol

Commands ” or Appendix C “ MODBUS Protocol ”.

●


Settings > Instrument ID.

INSTRUMENT ID:

CURRENTLY: 17

SET TO: 20 ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Communication Protocol

The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the instrument communication protocol for serial communications.

●


Settings > Communication Protocol.


Operation


COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL:

CURRENTLY: CLINK

SET TO: STREAMING ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Streaming Data Configuration

The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items, streaming interval, current data format, and current timestamp setting. The Choose Item Signal submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from.

Choices are Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).

Note Add Labels, Prepend Timestamp, and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected. ▲

Note The selected item list is different depending on the

AUTO/MANUAL MODE and RANGE MODE settings. Changing either of these settings will produce a different set of streaming data items.

If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis, then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting. ▲

●


Settings > Streaming Data Config.

STREAMING DATA CONFIG

>INTERVAL 10 SEC

ADD LABELS NO

PREPEND TIMESTAMP YES

ADD FLAGS YES

ITEM 1 NO 


Streaming Data Interval

The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust the streaming data interval. The following interval times are available: 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 60,

90, 120, 180, 240, and 300 seconds.


Operation


●


Settings > Streaming Data Config > Interval.

STREAMING DATA INTERVAL:

CURRENTLY: 10 SEC

SET TO: 20 SEC ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Choose Item Signal

The Choose Signal screen displays a submenu of the analog output signal group choices. Group choices are Concentrations, Other Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board is installed).

●


Settings > Streaming Data Config > Item 1-8.

CHOOSE STREAM DATA:

>CONCENTRATIONS

OTHER MEASUREMENTS

ANALOG INPUTS


Concentrations

The Concentrations screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item. The selected item is shown by

“<--” after it. In dual or auto range mode, “HI” or “LO” is displayed to indicate high or low range concentrations. RANGE is visible only in auto range mode.

●


Settings > Streaming Data Config > Select Item > Concentrations.


Operation


CONCENTRATIONS:

>NONE

NO

NO2 <--

NOx

NH3 


Nt

LO NO

LO NO2

LO NOx

LO NH3

LO Nt

HI NO

HI NO2

HI NOx

HI NH3

HI Nt

RANGE

Other Measurements

The Other Measurements screen allows the user to select the output signal that is tied to the selected streaming data item. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it. Items displayed are determined by the options installed.

●


Settings > Streaming Data Config > Select Item > Other

Measurements.

OTHER MEASUREMENTS:

>NONE

INT TEMP

CHAMBER TEMP

COOLER TEMP

NO2 CNV TEMP




EXT CNV TEMP

CHAMBER PRES

FLOW

PMT VOLTS

OZONATOR FLOW

CAPILRY TEMP

Analog Inputs

The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the analog input signal

(none or analog inputs 1-8) that is tied to the selected streaming data item.

The selected item is shown by “<--” after it.

●


Settings > Streaming Data Config > Select Item > Analog Inputs.


Operation


ANALOG INPUTS:

>NONE

ANALOG IN 1

ANALOG IN 2

ANALOG IN 3

ANALOG IN 4 


RS-232/RS-485 Selection

The RS-232/RS-485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the

RS-232 or RS-485 specification for serial communication.

Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing RS-232 and RS-485 selection to prevent damage to the connected equipment. ▲

●


Settings > RS-232/RS-485 Selection.

RS-232/RS-485 SELECTION:

XXXXXX ** WARNING ** XXXXXXX

DISCONNECT THE SERIAL X X

CABLES BEFORE CHANGING X

THE SELECTION!

XXXXXX

 TO CONTINUE


RS-232/RS-485 SELECTION:

CURRENTLY: RS-232

SET TO: RS-485 ?

MAKE SURE THAT THE CABLE XX

IS OFF: PRESS  TO CONFIRM



TOGGLE VALUE


TCP/IP Settings

The TCP/IP Settings menu is used for defining TCP/IP settings

Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect. ▲

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings.

TCP/IP SETTINGS:

>USE DHCP OFF

IP ADDR 10.209.43.237

NETMASK 255.255.254.0

GATEWAY 10.209.42.1

HOST NAME iSeries



Operation


Use DHCP

The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use DHCP or not.

When DHCP is enabled, the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument.

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Use DCHP.

DHCP:

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?

 TOGGLE VALUE

CYCLE POWER TO CHANGE DHCP


IP Address

The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address. The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is OFF. For more information on DHCP, see “ Use DHCP ” above.

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings > IP Address.

IP ADDRESS:

CURRENT: 10.209.43.237

SET TO: 10.209.43.237 1

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Netmask

The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask. The netmask is used to determine the subnet for which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices on. The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is

OFF. For more information on DHCP, see “ Use DHCP ” above.

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Netmask.


Operation


NETMASK:

CURRENT: 255.255.254.0

SET TO: 255.255.254.0 0



MOVE CURSOR

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Default Gateway

The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address. The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is OFF. For more information on DHCP, see “ Use DHCP ” above. Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address.

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Gateway.

DEFAULT GATEWAY:

CURRENT: 10.209.42.1

SET TO: 10.209.42.1 1



MOVE CURSOR

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Host Name

The host name screen is used to edit the host name. When DHCP is enabled, this name is reported to the DHCP server.

●


Settings > TCP/IP Settings > Host Name.

HOST NAME:

CURRENT: ISERIES

I SERIES SSSSS ?

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP

OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE


I/O Configuration

The I/O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer’s

I/O system. The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I/O expansion board option is installed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > I/O Configuration.


Operation


Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs. ▲

I/O CONFIGURATION:

>OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS

DIGITAL INPUT SETTINGS

ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG

ANALOG INPUT CONFIG


Output Relay Settings

The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available, and allows the user to select the logic state or instrument parameter for the relay selected.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > I/O Configuration >

Output Relay Settings.

OUTPUT RELAY SETTINGS:

>1 NOP GEN ALARM

2 NOP NONE

3 NOP UNITS

4 NOP CONC ALARM

5 NOP NONE 


Logic State

●

The Logic State screen is used to change the I/O relay to either normally open or normally closed.

Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed.

OUTPUT RELAY SETUP:

>LOGIC STATE OPEN

INSTRUMENT STATE


Instrument State

The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is tied to the selected relay output. A submenu lists signal types of either alarm or non-alarm to choose from.



Operation


●


Output Relay Settings > Select Relay > Instrument State.

CHOOSE SIGNAL TYPE:

>ALARMS

NON-ALARM


Alarms

The Alarms status screen allows the user to select the alarm status for the selected relay output. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it. The I/O

BD STATUS alarm is only present if the I/O expansion board is installed.

ZERO CHK/CAL and SPAN CHK/CAL are only present if the autozero/span check is enabled.

●


Output Relay Settings > Select Relay > Instrument State > Alarms.

ALARM STATUS ITEMS:

>NONE

GEN ALARM <--

NO CONC MAX

NO CONC MIN

NO2 CONC MAX 


NO2 CONC MIN

NOx CONC MAX

NOx CONC MIN

NH3 CONC MAX

NH3 CONC MIN

Nt CONC MAX

Nt CONC MIN

INT TEMP

CHAMB TEMP

COOLER TEMP

NO2 CV TEMP

EXT CV TEMP

PRESSURE

FLOW

OZONE FLOW

MB STATUS

MIB STATUS

I/O BD STATUS

CONC ALARM

EXT CONV STAT

ZERO CHK/CAL

SPAN CHK/CAL


Operation


Non-Alarm

The Non-Alarm status screen allows the user to select the non-alarm status for the selected relay output. The selected item is shown by “<--” after it.

●


Output Relay Settings > Select Relay > Instrument State > Non-Alarm.

NON ALARM STATUS ITEMS:

>NONE

AUTORANGE

LOCAL/REMOTE

SERVICE

UNITS 


ZERO MODE

SPAN MODE

NO MODE

NOX MODE

Nt MODE

SAMPLE MODE

PURGE MODE

Digital Input Settings

The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available, and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected.

Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated. ▲

●


Digital Input Settings.

DIGITAL INPUT SETTINGS:

>1 NOP NO MODE

2 NOP NOX MODE

3 NOP SET BACKGROUND

4 NOP CAL TO LO SPAN

5 NOP AOUTS TO ZERO 


Logic State

The Logic State screen is used to change the I/O relay to either normally open or normally closed. The default state is open, which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open


Operation

Instrument Controls Menu and closes to trigger the digital input action. If nothing is connected to the digital input pin, the state should be left at open to prevent the action from being triggered.

●

Press to toggle and set the logic state open or closed.

DIGITAL INPUT SETUP:

>LOGIC STATE OPEN

INSTRUMENT STATE


Instrument Action

The Instrument Action screen allows the user to choose the instrument action that is tied to the selected digital input.

●


Digital Input Settings > Select Relay > Instrument Action.

CHOOSE ACTION:

>NONE

ZERO MODE

SPAN MODE

NO MODE <--

NOX MODE




Nt MODE

SET BACKGROUND

CAL TO LO SPAN

AOUTS TO ZERO

AOUTS TO FS

CAL TO HI SPAN

Analog Output

Configuration

The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output channels available for configuration. Channel choices include all voltage channels, all current channels, voltage channels 1-6, and current channels 1-6 (if the I/O expansion board option is installed). Configuration choices include selecting range, setting minimum/maximum values, and choosing signal to output.



If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis, then the


Operation

Instrument Controls Menu user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting. ▲

●


Analog Output Config.

OUTPUT CHANNELS:

>ALL VOLTAGE CHANNELS

ALL CURRENT CHANNELS

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3




ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIG:

>SELECT RANGE

SET MINIMUM VALUE

SET MAXIMUM VALUE

CHOOSE SIGNAL TO OUTPUT


Select Output Range

The Select Output Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel. Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are:

0-100 mV, 0-1, 0-5, 0-10 V.

●


Analog Output Config > Select Channel > Select Range.

SELECT OUTPUT RANGE:

SELECTED OUTPUT: V ALL

CURRENTLY: 0-10V

SET TO: 0-5V ?



Minimum and Maximum

Value

The Minimum Value screen is used to edit the zero (0) to full-scale (100) value in percentages for the selected analog output channel. See Table 3–7 for a list of choices. In dual or auto range mode, “HI” or “LO” is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations. Range Status is visible only in auto range mode. The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way. The example below shows the set minimum value screen.



Operation


●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > IO Configuration >

Analog Output Config > Select Channel > Set Minimum or

Maximum Value.

MINIMUM OUTPUT PERCENT:

SELECTED OUTPUT: V ALL

CURRENTLY: N/A %

SET TO: 0000.

5 % ?



Table 3–7. Analog Output Zero to Full-Scale Table

LO NO x

LO NH

3

LO N t

HI NO

HI NO

2

HI NO x

HI NH

3

HI N t

Output

NO

NO

2

NO x

NH

3

N t

LO NO

LO NO

2

Zero % Value

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Zero (0)

Full-Scale 100% Value

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range Setting

Range

Internal Temp

Chamber Temp

Cooler Temp

Changing the setting for this output is not recommended

User-set alarm min value User-set alarm max value

User-set alarm min value


User-set alarm max value


NO

2

Converter Temp User-set alarm min value

External Converter Temp User-set alarm min value

Chamber Pressure

Flow








Operation


Output

PMT Volts

Ozonator Flow

Capillary Temp

Everything Else

Zero % Value

700 volts



0 Units

Full-Scale 100% Value

1100 volts



10 Units

Choose Signal to Output

The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a submenu list of the analog output signal group choices. Group choices are Concentrations, Other

Measurements, and Analog Inputs (if the I/O expansion board option is installed). This allows the user to select the output signal to the selected output channel. In dual or auto range mode, “HI” or “LO” is displayed to indicate high or low concentrations. Range is visible only in auto range mode. The Concentrations screen is shown below. See Table 3–8 below for a list of items for each signal group choice.



If either of these modes are going to be changed on a regular basis, then the user must configure each set of data separately after changing the modes to each setting. ▲

●


Analog Output Config > Select Channel > Choose Signal to Output.

CHOOSE SIGNAL TYPE:

>CONCENTRATIONS

OTHER MEASUREMENTS

ANALOG INPUTS


CHOOSE SIGNAL - CONC

SELECTED OUTPUT: V1

CURRENTLY: NO

SET TO: NONE ?



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE



Operation


Table 3–8. Signal Type Group Choices

Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs

None None None

NO (single/auto range) Internal Temp Analog Input 1 (if I/O Expansion board installed

NO

2

(single/auto range) Chamber Temp

NO

NH x

3

(single/auto range)

(single/auto range)

Cooler Temp

NO

2

Converter Temp

Analog Input 2 (if I/O Expansion board installed



N t

(single/auto range)

LO NO (dual)

External Converter Temp

Chamber Pressure



LO NO

2

(dual) Flow

LO NO

LO NH

LO N

HI NO (dual)

HI NO

2

(dual)

HI NO x

(dual)

HI NH

HI N t t

3 x

3

(dual)

(dual)

(dual)

(dual)

(dual)

Range (auto range)

PMT Volts

Ozonator Flow

Capillary Temp



Analog Input Configuration

The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration. This screen is only displayed if the I/O expansion board option is installed. Configuration includes entering descriptor, units, decimal places, choice of 1-10 points in the table, and corresponding number of points selected.

●


Analog Input Config.


Operation


ANALOG INPUT CONFIG:

>CHANNEL 1 IN1

CHANNEL 2 IN2

CHANNEL 3 IN3

CHANNEL 4 IN4

CHANNEL 5 IN7 


ANALOG INPUT 01 CONFIG:

>DESCRIPTOR IN1

UNITS V

DECIMAL PLACES 2

TABLE POINTS 2

POINT 1 


POINT 2

Descriptor

The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor for the selected analog input channel. The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out. The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length, and defaults to IN1 to IN8 (user input channel number).

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Descriptor.

ANALOG INPUT DESCRIPTOR:

CURRENTLY: IN1

I N1

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP

OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE


Units

The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel. The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data. The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length, and defaults to V (volts).

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Units.


Operation


ANALOG INPUT UNITS:

CURRENTLY: V

V N1

ABCDEFGHIJKLMN BKSP

OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE


Decimal Places

The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal, from 0 to 6, with a default of 2.

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Decimal Places.

DECIMAL PLACES:

CURRENTLY: 2

SET TO: 3 ?

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Number of Table Points

The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the conversion table. The points range from 2 to 10, with a default of 2.

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Table Points.

NUMBER OF TABLE POINTS:

CURRENTLY: 2

SET TO: 10 ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Table Point

The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point.

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Point 1-10.


Operation


TABLE POINT 01 CONFIG:

>VOLTS 0.00

USER VALUE 0.00


Volts

The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table, from 0.00 to 10.50. The default table is a two-point table with point 1: 0.00 V = 000.0 U and point 2: 10.00 V =

10.0 U.

●


Analog Input Config > Select Channel > Select Point > Volts.

TABLE POINT 01 VOLTS:

CURRENTLY: 0.00

SET TO: 00.0

0

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


User Value

The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table, from -9999999 to 99999999. The default table is a two-point table with point 1: 0.00 V = 000.0 U and point 2: 10.00 V = 10.0 U.

●


Analog Input Config > Select Table Point > User Value.

TABLE POINT 01 USER VAL:

CURRENTLY: 0.00

SET TO: 00000.0

0



MOVE CURSOR




Operation


Temperature

Compensation

Temperature compensation provides compensation for any changes to the instrument's output signal due to internal instrument temperature variations. The effects of internal instrument temperature changes on the analyzer's subsystems and output have been empirically determined. This empirical data is used to compensate for any changes in temperature. This compensation can be used for special applications, or when operating the instrument outside the recommended temperature range.

When temperature compensation is on, the display shows the current internal instrument temperature (measured by a thermistor on the Interface board). When temperature compensation is off, the display shows the factory standard temperature of 30 °C.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Temperature

Compensation.

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION:

COMP TEMP: 30.0 o

C

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?



TOGGLE VALUE


Pressure Compensation

Pressure compensation provides compensation for any changes to the instrument's output signal due to reaction chamber pressure variations. The effects of reaction chamber pressure changes on the analyzer's subsystems and output have been empirically determined. This empirical data is used to compensate for any change in reaction chamber pressure.

When pressure compensation is on, the first line of the display represents the current pressure in the reaction chamber. When pressure compensation is off, the first line of the display shows the factory standard pressure of 100 mmHg.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Pressure

Compensation.


Operation


PRESSURE COMPENSATION:

COMP PRES: 100.0 mmHg

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?

 TOGGLE VALUE


Screen Contrast

●

The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display.

Intensities between 0 and 100% in increments of 10 are available.

Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures.

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Screen Contrast.

SCREEN CONTRAST:

CURRENTLY: 50 %

SET TO: 60 % ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Service Mode

The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off. The service mode locks out any remote actions and includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the

Model 17i. For more information about the service mode, see “ Service

Menu ” later in this chapter.

Note The service mode should be turned off when finished, as it prevents remote operation. ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Service Mode.

SERVICE MODE:

CURRENTLY: OFF

SET TO: ON ?

 TOGGLE VALUE



Operation

Diagnostics Menu

Date/Time

The Date/Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time (24-hour format). The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Date/Time.

DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2005 12:34:56

PRESS



TO EDIT


DATE AND TIME:

19 MAR 2005 12:34:56 ?

SETTING: DAYS



SET MONTHS

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Diagnostics Menu

The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions. This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument. The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the

I/O expansion board option is installed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics.

DIAGNOSTICS:

>PROGRAM VERSION

VOLTAGES

TEMPERATURES

PRESSURE

FLOW




ANALOG INPUT READINGS

ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES

DIGITAL INPUTS

RELAY STATES

TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS

INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION

CONTACT INFORMATION

Program Version

The Program Version screen (read only) shows the version number of the program installed. Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument, please note the product model name and program version number.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Program Version.


Operation

Diagnostics Menu

PROGRAM VERSIONS:

PRODUCT: MODEL 17i

VERSION: 01.00.01.074

FIRMWARE: 09.06.19


Voltages

The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings. This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter. The I/O board item is only displayed if the I/O expansion board option is installed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages.

VOLTAGES:

>MOTHERBOARD

INTERFACE BOARD

I/O BOARD

EXT CONVERTER BOARD


Motherboard Voltages

The Motherboard screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage readings on the motherboard.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > Motherboard

Voltages.

MOTHERBOARD VOLTAGES:

3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V

5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V

15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V

24.0 SUPPLY 24.1 V

-3.3 SUPPLY -3.3 V


Interface Board Voltages

The Interface Board screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage readings on the interface board.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > Interface Board

Voltages.


Operation

Diagnostics Menu

INTERFACE BOARD VOLTAGES:

PMT -785.5 V

3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V

5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V

15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V

P15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V 


24.0 SUPPLY 24.0 V

-15.0 SUPPLY -15.0 V

I/O Board Voltages

The I/O Board screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage readings on the I/O expansion board. This menu is only displayed if the

I/O expansion board option is installed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > I/O Board

Voltages.

I/O BOARD VOLTAGES:

3.3 SUPPLY 3.3 V

5.0 SUPPLY 5.0 V

24.0 SUPPLY 24.0 V

-3.3 SUPPLY -3.3 V


External Converter Board

Voltages

The External Converter Board screen (read only) is used to display the current voltage readings on the external converter board.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Voltages > Ext Converter

Board Voltages.

EXT CONV BOARD VOLTAGES:

15.0 SUPPLY 15.0 V

24.0 SUPPLY 24.0 V

-15.0 SUPPLY -15.0 V


Temperatures

The Temperatures screen (read only) displays the internal temperature, reaction chamber temperature, cooler temperature, and converter temperatures. The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the interface board.


Operation

Diagnostics Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Temperatures.

TEMPERATURES:

INTERNAL 28.6

CHAMBER 49.0

CAPILLARY 49.8

COOLER -10.0 o o o o

C

C

C

C

NO2 CONVERTER 320.7 o

C 


NO2 CONV SET 325.0

EXT CONVERTER 745.7

EXT CONV SET 750.0 o

C o

C o

C

Pressure

The Pressure screen (read only) displays the reaction chamber pressure. The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer at the reaction chamber.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Pressure.

PRESSURE: 133.0 mmHg


Flow

●

The Flow screen (read only) displays the sample and ozonator flow rate.

The flows are measured by internal flow sensors.

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Flow.

FLOW: 0.500 LPM

OZONATOR FLOW OK


Analog Input Readings

The Analog Input Readings screen (read only) displays the 8 current userscaled analog readings (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Analog Input Readings.


Operation

Diagnostics Menu

ANALOG INPUT READINGS:

>CO 10.2 PPM

SO2 18.2 PPB

CO2 250 PPM

FL1 20.42 LPM

IO5 0.0 V 


Analog Input Voltages

●

The Analog Input Voltages screen (read only) displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Analog Input Voltages.

ANALOG INPUT VOLTAGES:

>ANALOG IN 1 6.24 V

ANALOG IN 2 4.28 V

ANALOG IN 3 0.00 V

ANALOG IN 4 0.00 V

ANALOG IN 5 0.00 V




Digital Inputs

The Digital Inputs screen (read only) displays the state of the 16 digital inputs.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Digital Inputs.

DIGITAL INPUTS:

>INPUT 1 1

INPUT 2 1

INPUT 3 1

INPUT 4 1

INPUT 5 1




Relay States

●

The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on (1) or off (0). The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Relay States.

Press to toggle and set the relay state open or closed.


Operation

Diagnostics Menu

RELAY STATE:

>OUTPUT 1 0

OUTPUT 2 0

OUTPUT 3 0

OUTPUT 4 1

OUTPUT 5 1 


Test Analog Outputs

●

The Test Analog Outputs menu contains a number of digital to analog converter (DAC) calibration items. Channel choices include all analog outputs, 6 voltage channels, and 6 current channels (if the I/O expansion board option is installed).

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Test Analog Outputs.

TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS:

>ALL

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4


Set Analog Outputs

The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices: Set to full-scale, set to zero, or reset to normal. Full-scale sets the analog outputs to the fullscale voltage, zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts, and normal operation.

The example below shows the selected output state “ALL” is set to normal.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Test Analog Outputs > ALL,

Voltage Channel 1-6, or Current Channel 1-6.

SET ANALOG OUTPUTS:

SETTING: ALL

OUTPUT SET TO: NORMAL

 SET TO FULL SCALE



SET TO ZERO

 RESET TO NORMAL


Instrument Configuration

The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument.


Operation

Alarms Menu

Note If the analyzer is in service mode, pressing on the item will toggle it yes or no (with the exception of some items such as dilution and auto calibration, which may only be enabled at the factory). ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Instrument Configuration.

INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION:

>I/O EXPANSION BOARD YES

ZERO/SPAN VALVES YES

PERM DRYER YES

NH3 SCRUBBER YES

CONVERTER MOLY




DILUTION NO

AUTO CALIBRATION NO

Contact Information

The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Diagnostics > Contact Information.

CONTACT INFORMATION:

CALL CENTER: 508-520-0430

WEB: WWW.THERMO.COM


Alarms Menu

The alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer.

If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit, the status of that item will go from “OK” to either “LOW” or “HIGH”, respectively. If the alarm is not a level alarm, the status will go from “OK” to “FAIL”. The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred. If no alarms are detected, the number zero is displayed.

To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits, move the cursor to the item and press

.

Items displayed are determined by the options installed. The zero/span check and auto calibration alarms are visible only if the zero/span check or auto calibration options are enabled and the instrument is in manual

(single gas) mode. The motherboard status, interface board status, and I/O

Expansion board status (if installed), and external converter status indicate


Operation

Alarms Menu that the power supplies are working and connections are successful. There are no setting screens for these alarms.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms.

ALARMS:

ALARMS DETECTED 0

>INTERNAL TEMP OK

CHAMBER TEMP OK

CAPILLARY TEMP OK

COOLER TEMP OK 


CONVERTER TEMP OK

EXT CONVERTER TEMP OK

PRESSURE OK

FLOW OK

OZONATOR FLOW OK

ZERO CHECK OK

SPAN CHECK OK

ZERO AUTOCAL OK

SPAN AUTOCAL OK

NO CONCENTRATION OK

NO2 CONCENTRATION OK

NOx CONCENTRATION OK

NH3 CONCENTRATION OK

Nt CONCENTRATION OK

MOTHERBOARD STATUS OK

INTERFACE STATUS OK

I/O EXP STATUS OK

EXT CONV BD STATUS OK

Internal Temperature

●

The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 °C. If the internal temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum alarm limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Internal Temp.

INTERNAL TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL 28.6 o

C

>MIN 15.0

MAX 45.0 o o

C

C



Operation

Alarms Menu

Min and Max Internal

Temperature Limits

The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum internal temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Internal Temp > Min or Max.

INTERNAL TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN: 15.0 o

SET MIN TO: 16.0 o

C

C ?

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE


Chamber Temperature

●

The Chamber Temperature screen displays the current chamber temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 45 to 55 °C. If the chamber temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated.

The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Chamber Temp.

CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL 49.0

MAX 52.0 o

>MIN 48.0 o o

C

C

C


Min and Max Chamber


●

The Minimum Chamber Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum chamber temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum chamber temperature screens function the same way.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Chamber Temp > Min or Max.

CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN: 47.0 o o

SET MIN TO: 48.0

C

C ?

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE



Operation

Alarms Menu

Capillary Temperature

The Capillary Temperature screen displays the current capillary temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 45 to 55 °C. If the capillary temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated.

The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Capillary Temp.

CAPILLARY TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL 49.8 o o

C

>MIN 48.0

MAX 52.0 o

C

C


Min and Max Capillary


●

The Minimum Capillary Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum capillary temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum capillary temperature screens function the same way.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Capillary Temp > Min or Max.

CAPILLARY TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN 48.0 o

C

SET MIN TO: 47.0 o

C ?



INC/DEC

 SAVE VALUE


Cooler Temperature

●

The Cooler Temperature screen displays the current cooler temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from -40 to 10 °C. If the cooler temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word

“ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Cooler Temp.


Operation

Alarms Menu

COOLER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL -9.8

>MIN -20.0

MAX -1.0 o o o

C

C

C


Min and Max Cooler


The Minimum Cooler Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum cooler temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum cooler temperature screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Cooler Temp > Min or Max.

COOLER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN -20.0 o o

C

SET MIN TO: -10.0 C ?

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE


Converter Temperature

●

The Converter Temperature screen displays the current converter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 300 to 1000 °C. The actual alarm setpoints should be set for the installed converter. If the converter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Converter Temp.

CONVERTER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL 320.7 o

>MIN 300.0 o

MAX 350.0 o

C

C

C


Min and Max Converter


The Minimum Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum converter temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum converter temperature screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Converter Temp > Min or Max.


Operation

Alarms Menu

CONVERTER TEMPERATURE:

ACTUAL MIN 300.0

SET MIN TO: 310.0



INC/DEC o o

C

C ?

 SAVE VALUE


External Converter

Temperature

●

The External Converter Temperature screen displays the current external converter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits.

Acceptable alarm limits range from 300 to 1000 °C. The actual alarm setpoints should be set for the installed converter. If the external converter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Ext Converter Temp.

EXT CONVERTER TEMP:

ACTUAL 750.0 o

>MIN 725.0

MAX 775.0 o o

C

C

C


Min and Max External

Converter Temperature Limits

The Minimum External Converter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum external converter temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum external converter temperature screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Ext Converter Temp > Min or

Max.

EXT CONVERTER TEMP:

ACTUAL MIN 725.0

SET MIN TO: 700.0

 INC/DEC o o

C

C ?



SAVE VALUE



Operation

Alarms Menu

Pressure

The Pressure screen displays the current reaction chamber pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 200 mmHg. If the pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Pressure.

PRESSURE:

ACTUAL 157.6 mmHg

>MIN 50.0 mmHg

MAX 150.0 mmHg


Min and Max Pressure

Limits

●

The Minimum Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum temperature alarm limit. The minimum and maximum pressure screens function the same way.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Pressure > Min or Max.

PRESSURE:

ACTUAL MIN: 50.0 mmHg

SET MIN TO: 80.0 mmHg?



INC/DEC

 SAVE VALUE


Flow

●

The Flow screen displays the current sample flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from

0 to 1 LPM. If the sample flow reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Flow.


Operation

Alarms Menu

FLOW:

ACTUAL 0.700 LPM

>MIN 0.350 LPM

MAX 0.900 LPM


Min and Max Flow Limits

The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum sample flow alarm limit. The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Flow > Min or Max.

FLOW:

ACTUAL MIN: 0.350 LPM

SET MIN TO: 0.400 LPM ?

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE


Ozonator Flow

●

The Ozonator Flow screen (read only) is used to display the ozonator flow readings. If the ozonator flow reading is 0.050 LPM (50 cc) or below, an alarm is activated, and an alarm condition screen appears as “LOW”. If the ozonator flow is above 0.050, the no alarm condition screen is displayed, indicating that the flow is acceptable. Inadequate ozonator flow will cause the ozonator to overheat, resulting in permanent damage to the ozonator.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Ozonator Flow.

OZONATOR FLOW:

ACTUAL > 0.050 LPM


Zero and Span Check

The Zero and Span Check screens allow the user to view the status of the most recent zero/span checks and set the maximum check offsets. The zero and span check screens are visible only if the zero/span check option is enabled and the instrument is in manual (single gas) mode. The zero and span check screens function the same way.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Check.

ZERO CHECK:

ALARM: OK

RESPONSE: 0.0

>MAX OFFSET 10.0


Operation

Alarms Menu

Max Zero and Span Offset

The Max Zero and Span Check Offset screens are used to change the maximum check offsets. The maximum zero and span offset screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Check > Max

Offset.

MAX ZERO CHECK OFFSET:

CURRENTLY: 10.0

SET TO: 0001 1 .00 ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Zero and Span Auto

Calibration

●

The Zero and Span Auto Calibration screens (read only) allow the user to view the status of the most recent auto background or span calibrations.

The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if the auto calibration option is enabled and the instrument is in manual (single gas) mode. The zero and span auto calibration screens function the same way.

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Zero or Span Autocal.

ZERO AUTO CALIBRATION:

ALARM: OK

RESPONSE: 5.0


NO, NO

2

, NO

x

, NH

3

, and

N

t

Concentration

The Concentration alarm screens display the current NO, NO

2

, NO x

,

NH

3

, and N t

concentrations and set the minimum and maximum alarm


Operation

Alarms Menu limits. Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100000 ppb (0 to 100 ppm) and 0 to 150000 μg/m

3

(0 to 150 mg/m

3

). The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value) or a ceiling trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value). If the NO concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit, an alarm is activated. The word “ALARM” appears in the Run screen and in the Main Menu. The NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > NO, NO2, NOx, NH3, or Nt

Concentration.

NO CONCENTRATION:

ACTUAL 62.7

>MIN 100000.0

MAX 100000.0

MIN TRIGGER CEILING


Min and Max NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

Concentration Limits

The Minimum Concentration alarm limit screens are used to change the minimum concentration alarm limits. The minimum and maximum NO,

NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm limit screens function the same way.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Select Concentration > Min or

Max.

NO CONCENTRATION:

ACTUAL MIN: 0.0

SET MIN TO: 000 2 0.00 ?



MOVE CURSOR



Min Trigger

The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the NO,

NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling. The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value) or a ceiling trigger (alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value).


Operation

Service Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Alarms > Select Concentration > Min

Trigger.

MIN TRIG(CEILING/FLOOR):

ACTUAL TRIGGER: CEILING

SET TRIGGER TO: FLOOR ?

 TOGGLE AND SAVE VALUE


Service Menu

●

The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode.

To put the instrument into the service mode:

●

In the Main Menu, choose Instrument Controls > Service Mode.

Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode.

Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode.

In the Main Menu, choose Service.

SERVICE:

>PMT VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

RANGE MODE SELECT

CONVERTER SET TEMP

EXT CONVERTER SET TEMP

PRESSURE CALIBRATION




FLOW CALIBRATION

INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION

TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION

ANALOG OUT CALIBRATION

ANALOG INPUT CALIBRATION

OZONATOR SAFETY

EXTENDED RANGES

DILUTION RATIO

DISPLAY PIXEL TEST

RESTORE USER DEFAULTS

PMT Voltage Adjustment

The PMT Voltage Adjustment screen is used to manually adjust the PMT supply voltage. The PMT voltage adjustment screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in this chapter.

Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician. ▲


Operation

Service Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > PMT Voltage Adjustment.

SET PMT VOLTAGE:

SET PMT: -750.0 V

COUNTS: 2254 ?



CHANGE VALUE

 SAVE VALUE


Range Mode Select

The Range Mode Select screen is used to switch between the various range modes: single, dual, and auto range. The range mode select screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in this chapter.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Range Mode Select.

RANGE MODE SELECT:

CURRENTLY: SINGLE

SET TO: DUAL ?

 CHANGE VALUE



SAVE VALUE


Converter Set Temperature

The Set Converter Temperature screen is used to change the converter set temperature. The converter set temperature reading is updated every second. The converter set temperature screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.

Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician.

▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Converter Set Temperature.

SET CONVERTER TEMP:

CURRENTLY: 325

SET TO: 325 o o

C

C

 INC/DEC



SAVE VALUE



Operation

Service Menu

External Converter Set

Temperature

The External Converter Set Temperature screen is used to change the external converter set temperature. The external converter set temperature reading is updated every second. The external converter set temperature screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Ext Converter Set Temperature.

SET EXT CONVERTER TEMP:

CURRENTLY: 750 o

SET TO: 750 o

C

C



INC/DEC

 SAVE VALUE


Pressure Calibration

The Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the pressure sensor to zero, span, or restore factory default values. The pressure calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in this chapter.

The pressure sensor’s zero counts and span slope are displayed on the menu.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration.

PRESSURE SENSOR CAL:

>ZERO 72

SPAN 1.1416

SET DEFAULTS



Operation

Service Menu

Calibrate Pressure Zero

The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen calibrates the pressure sensor at zero pressure.

Note A vacuum pump must be connected to the pressure sensor before performing the zero calibration. Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value. ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Zero.

CALIBRATE PRESSURE ZERO:

CURRENTLY: 157.6 mmHg

SET TO: 0.0 mmHg

CONNECT VACUUM PUMP AND

 SAVE ZERO PRESSURE


Calibrate Pressure Span

The Calibrate Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the pressure sensor calibration span point.

Note The plumbing going to the pressure sensor should be disconnected so the sensor is reading ambient pressure before performing the span calibration. The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating.

Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value. ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Span.

CALIBRATE PRESSURE SPAN:

CURRENTLY: 157.6 mmHg

SET TO: 760.

0 mmHg ?

 MOVE CURSOR




Operation

Service Menu

Restore Default Pressure

Calibration

The Restore Default Pressure Calibration screen allows the user to reset the pressure calibration configuration values to factory defaults.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Pressure Calibration > Set

Defaults.


 RESTORE



 RESTORE


x

PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE


Flow Calibration

The Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the flow sensor to zero, span, or restore factory default values. The flow calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration.

FLOW SENSOR CAL:

>ZERO 200

SPAN 1.0000

SET DEFAULTS


Calibrate Flow Zero

The Calibrate Flow Zero screen calibrates the flow sensor at zero flow.

Note The pump must be disconnected before performing the zero calibration. Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value. ▲


Operation

Service Menu

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Zero.

CALIBRATE FLOW ZERO:

CURRENTLY: 0.004 LPM

SET TO: 0.000 LPM ?

DISCONNECT PUMP AND

 SAVE CURRENT FLOW


Calibrate Flow Span

The Calibrate Flow Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point.

Note An independent flow sensor is required to read the flow, then the operator enters the flow value on this screen to perform the calibration.

Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value. ▲

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Span.

CALIBRATE FLOW SPAN:

CURRENTLY: 0.800 LPM

SET TO: 0.50

0 LPM ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Restore Default Flow

Calibration

The Restore Default Flow Calibration screen allows the user to reset the flow calibration configuration values to factory defaults.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Flow Calibration > Set Defaults.




RESTORE





RESTORE


x

PRESS  TO CONFIRM RESTORE



Operation

Service Menu

Input Board Calibration

The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the input A/D stages. The input board calibration menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration.

INPUT BOARD CALIBRATION:

>MANUAL INPUT CAL

AUTOMATIC INPUT CAL

INPUT FREQUENCY DISP


Manual Input Calibration

The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of the input board A/D stages per the following procedure:

Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen. ▲

1. In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration >

Manual Input Calibration.

2. Press to leave warning screen.

3. Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1.

4. Use and to change the gain between 10 and 100.

5. Use and to increment or decrement the D/A counts so the frequency at gain 100 is equal to the frequency at gain 1.

6. Press to save new input board calibration.


Operation

Service Menu


 TO CALIBRATE

** WARNING ** x THIS ACTION MAY REQUIRE xx xx RECALIBRATION OF THE XXXX

ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM!


GAIN 1 - MANUAL:

FREQ = 4500

D/A = N/A ?


x

 CHG GAIN



SAVE VALUES


Automatic Input Calibration

The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do an automatic calibration of the input board A/D stages. A message will be displayed after the optimum setting has been determined.

Note The measurement system and the PMT are both shut off inside this screen. ▲

●

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration >

Automatic Input Calibration.

Press to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration.


 TO CALIBRATE

** WARNING ** x THIS ACTION MAY REQUIRE xx xx RECALIBRATION OF THE XXXX

ENTIRE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM!



** IN PROGRESS **

D/A = 2047

TARGET = 0

FREQ = 0 0

ZERO = 0 CNT = 1


Input Frequency Display

The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input board gain. This may be used as a troubleshooting tool for the input board.

The gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen.

●

●

●

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Input Board Calibration > Input

Frequency Display.

Press to leave warning screen.

Use

Use

and

and

to toggle the test signal and bypass the PMT.

to change the gain between 1, 10 and 100.


Operation

Service Menu


 TO CALIBRATE

** WARNING **

CONCENTRATION CALCULATION x xx IS HALTED INSIDE XX XX

THIS SCREEN! XX


INPUT GAIN TEST:

GAIN = 1

TEST = OFF

FREQ = 5000

 CHG GAIN  TEST MODE


Temperature Calibration

The Temperature calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor calibration. Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value. The temperature calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Temperature Calibration.

CALIBRATE AMBIENT TEMP:

CURRENTLY: 32.3

SET TO: 032.

5 o o

C

C ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Analog Output Calibration

The Analog Output Calibration menu is a selection of 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels to calibrate, and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span. Current channels are visible only if the I/O expansion board is installed. The analog output calibration is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Calibration.


Operation

Service Menu

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL:

>VOLTAGE CHANNEL 1

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 2

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 3

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 4

VOLTAGE CHANNEL 5 


ANALOG OUTPUT CAL:

>CALIBRATE ZERO

CALIBRATE FULL SCALE


Analog Output Calibrate

Zero

The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog output. The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0.0 V on the meter.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Calibration > Select

Channel > Calibrate Zero.

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL: ZERO

CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT!

SELECTED OUTPUT: V1

SET TO: 100



SAVE VALUE



INC/DEC

SET OUTPUT TO: 0.0 V


Analog Output Calibrate

Full-Scale

The Analog Output Calibrate Full-Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full-scale state of the selected analog output. The operator must connect a meter to the output and adjust output until it reads the value shown in the set output to: field.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Out Calibration > Select

Channel > Calibrate Full Scale.


Operation

Service Menu

ANALOG OUTPUT CAL: SPAN

CONNECT METER TO OUTPUT!

SELECTED OUTPUT: V1

SET TO: 3397



SAVE VALUE



INC/DEC

SET OUTPUT TO: 10 V


Analog Input Calibration

The Analog Input Calibration menu is a selection of 8 analog input channels to calibrate, and allows the user to select the calibration action zero or span. The analog input calibration is visible only when the I/O expansion board is installed and the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Calibration.

ANALOG INPUT CAL:

>INPUT CHANNEL 1

INPUT CHANNEL 2

INPUT CHANNEL 3

INPUT CHANNEL 4

INPUT CHANNEL 5




ANALOG INPUT CAL:

>CALIBRATE ZERO

CALIBRATE FULL SCALE


Analog Input Calibrate

Zero

The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog input.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Calibration > Select

Channel > Calibrate Zero. (Hook up a voltage source of 0 V to the analog input channel.)


Operation

Service Menu

ANALOG INPUT CAL: ZERO

DISCONNECT SELECTED INPUT!

SELECTED INPUT: INPUT1

CURRENTLY: 0.04 V ?

 CALIBRATE INPUT TO ZERO


Analog Input Calibrate

Full-Scale

The Analog Input Calibration Full-Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full-scale state of the selected analog input.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Analog Input Calibration > Select

Channel > Calibrate Full Scale. (Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel.)

ANALOG INPUT CAL: SPAN

PROVIDE VOLTAGE TO INPUT!

SELECTED INPUT: INPUT1

CURRENTLY: 9.84 V

SET TO: 10.0

0 V ?



CALIBRATE INPUT TO ZERO


Ozonator Safety

●

The Ozonator Safety screen is used to turn the ozonator safety feature on or off. If the ozonator safety is turned off, the ozonator will always be on, even if the converter is not up to temperature. The ozonator safety screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Ozonator Safety.

OZONATOR SAFETY:

CURRENTLY: ON

SET TO: OFF ?



TOGGLE VALUE


Extended Ranges

The Extended Ranges screen is used to turn the extended ranges feature on or off. The extended ranges screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service

Mode ” earlier in the chapter.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Extended Ranges.


Operation

Service Menu

EXTENDED RANGES:

CURRENTLY: ON

SET TO: OFF ?

 TOGGLE VALUE


Dilution Ratio

The Dilution Ratio screen allows the user to view and set the dilution ratio.

Acceptable values are 1–500: 1. The default is 1:1. When this value is set, the dilution ratio is applied to all concentration measurements. This screen is only accessible if the dilution ratio option is installed.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Dilution Ratio.

DILUTION RATIO:

CURRENTLY: 001.00 :1

SET TO: 00 2 .00 :1 ?

 MOVE CURSOR



CHANGE VALUE



SAVE


Display Pixel Test

The Display Pixel Test is used to test the LCD display. The display pixel test is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Display Pixel Test.

DISPLAY PIXEL TEST:

DURING TEST PRESS



OR  xx

TO EXIT,



TO TOGGLE XXXXXx



BEGIN TEST

 GO BACK TO MENU


Restore User Defaults

The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults. The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode. For more information on the service mode, see “ Service Mode ” earlier in the chapter.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Service > Restore User Defaults.


Operation

Password Menu

RESTORE USER DEFAULTS:



RESTORE


RESTORE USER DEFAULTS:



RESTORE


x

PRESS



TO CONFIRM RESTORE


Password Menu

The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection. If the instrument is locked, none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface. The items visible under the password menu are determined by the instrument’s password status.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Password.

PASSWORD MENU:

>SET PASSWORD

LOCK INSTRUMENT

CHANGE PASSWORD

REMOVE PASSWORD

UNLOCK INSTRUMENT


Set Password

●

The Set Password screen is used to set the password to unlock the front panel. The set password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set.

In the Main Menu, choose Password > Set Password

ENTER NEW PASSWORD:

R ANGXXXXXE


OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE


Lock Instrument

The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument’s front panel so users can not change any settings from the front panel. The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set.


●

In the Main Menu, choose Password > Lock Instrument

LOCK FRONT PANEL:

XXX PRESSING ENTER WILL XXXX

PREVENT USER FROM CHANGING

X CONFIG FROM FRONT PANEL XX



LOCK AND RETURN TO RUN


Operation

Change Password

Change Password

●

The Change Password is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument’s front panel. The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked.

In the Main Menu, choose Password > Change Password

ENTER NEW PASSWORD:

R ANGXXXXXE


OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE


Remove Password

The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection. The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password set.

●

In the Main Menu, choose Password > Remove Password

REMOVE PASSWORD:

XXX PRESSING ENTER WILL XXXX

X REMOVE CURRENT PASSWORD XX

XXX AND DISABLE LOCKING XXXX

 REMOVE PASSWORD


Unlock Instrument

The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel. The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked.


Operation

Unlock Instrument

●

In the Main Menu, choose Password > Unlock Instrument

ENTER THE PASSWORD:

R ANGXXXXXE


OPQRSTUVWXYZ PAGE

0123456789 ./- SAVE



Chapter 4

Calibration

This chapter describes procedures for performing a multipoint calibration of the Model 17i. The information described here is considered adequate to perform the calibration. However, if greater detail is desired, the user is referred to the United States Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part

50, Appendix F.

The calibration technique is based on the rapid gas phase reaction between

NO and O

3

which produces stoichiometric quantities of NO

2

in accordance with the reaction:

NO + O

3



NO

2

+

O

2

The quantitative nature of this reaction is such that when the NO concentration is known, the concentration of NO

2

can be determined.

Ozone is added to excess NO in a dynamic calibration system, and the NO channel of the chemiluminescence NH

3

analyzer is used as an indicator of changes in NO concentration.

When O

3

is added, the decrease in NO concentration observed on the calibrated NO channel is equivalent to the concentration of NO

2 produced. Adding variable amounts of O

3

from a stable O

3

generator can change the amount of NO

2

generated. The following sections discuss the required apparatus and procedures for calibrating the instrument:

●

●

●

●

●

“ Equipment Required ” on page 4-1

“ Pre-Calibration ” on page 4-9

“ Calibration ” on page 4-10

“ Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode ” on page 4-17

“ Zero and Span Check ” on page 4-18

Equipment Required

The following equipment is required to calibrate the analyzer:

●

Zero gas generator

●

Gas phase titrator


Calibration

Equipment Required

Zero Gas Generator

A zero air source, such as a Thermo Scientific Model 111 Zero Air Supply or

Model 1160 Zero Air Supply, free of contaminants such as NO x

and O

3

is required for dilution, calibration, and gas phase titration.

Compression

The zero air source should be at an elevated pressure to allow accurate and reproducible flow control and to aid in subsequent operations such as drying, oxidation, and scrubbing. An air compressor that gives an output of

10 psig is usually sufficient for most applications.

Drying

Several drying methods are available. Passing the compressed air through a bed of silica gel, using a heatless air dryer, or removing water vapor with a permeation dryer, are three possible approaches.

Oxidation

NO is usually oxidized to NO

2

in order to ease its scrubbing. Oxidation can be accomplished by either ozonation or chemical contact. During ozonation, the air is passed through an ozone generator. The O

3

that is produced reacts with the NO to form NO

2

. Care must be taken to allow sufficient residence time for the ozonation reaction to go to completion.

Chemical oxidation is accomplished by passing the air stream through a reacting bed. Such agents as CrO

3

on an alumina support or Purafil® are very efficient at oxidizing NO to NO

2

. The chemical contact approach has the advantage of needing no electrical power input for its application.

Scrubbing

Fixed bed reactors are commonly used in the last step of zero air generation to remove the remaining contaminants by either further reaction or absorption. Table 4–1 lists materials that can be effective in removing contaminants.

Table 4–1. Scrubbing Materials

To Remove

NO

2

Use

Soda-Lime (6-12 mesh), Purafil

Hydrocarbons Molecular Sieve (4A), Activated Charcoal

O

3

and SO

2

Activated


Calibration

Equipment Required

Gas Phase Titrator

A gas phase titrator (GPT), such as is included in the Thermo Scientific

Model 146 Series Multigas Calibration System, is used to generate NO

2 concentrations from NO concentrations. Figure 4–1 shows the suggested placement of the component parts of a gas phase titration apparatus.

Equipment Damage All connections between components in the system should be made with glass, Teflon®, or other non-reactive material. ▲

Flow Controllers

The zero air flow controllers should be devices capable of maintaining constant airflows within



2% of the required flow rate. The NO flow controller should be capable of maintaining constant NO flows within



2% of the required flow rate.

Pressure Regulator

The pressure regulator for the standard NO cylinder must have a nonreactive diaphragm and internal parts, and a suitable delivery pressure.


Figure 4–1. GPT System


Calibration

Equipment Required

Ozone Generator

The ozone generator must be capable of generating sufficient and stable levels of ozone for reaction with NO to generate NO

2

concentrations in the range required.

Note Ozone generators of the electric discharge type may produce NO and

NO

2

and are not recommended. ▲

Diverter Valve

A valve can be used to divert the NO flow when zero air is required at the manifold.

Reaction Chamber

The reaction chamber used for the reaction of ozone with excess NO should have sufficient volume so that the residence time meets the requirements specified in this chapter.

Mixing Chamber

The mixing chamber is used to provide thorough mixing of the reaction products and diluent air.

Output Manifold

The output manifold should be of sufficient diameter to insure an insignificant pressure drop at the analyzer connection. The system must have a vent designed to insure atmospheric pressure at the manifold and to prevent ambient air from entering the manifold.

Reagents

The following information describes the NO concentration standard and the method for calculating the NO concentration standard and the NO

2 impurity.

NO Concentration Standard

A cylinder containing 10 to 50 ppm NO in N

2

with less than 1 ppm NO

2 is usually used as the concentration standard. The cylinder must be traceable to a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) NO in N

2

Standard Reference Material or NO

2

Standard Reference Material.

Procedures for certifying the NO cylinder (working standard) against an

NIST traceable NO or NO

2

standard and for determining the amount of

NO

2

impurity are given in USEPA Publication No. EPA-600/4-75-003,

“Technical Assistance Document for the Chemiluminescence Measurement of Nitrogen Dioxide.”


Calibration

Equipment Required

In addition, the procedure for the certification of a NO working standard against an NIST traceable NO standard and determination of the amount of NO

2

impurity in the working standard is reproduced here. The cylinder should be re-certified on a regular basis as determined by the local quality control program.

Use the NIST traceable NO standard and the GPT calibration procedure to calibrate the NO, NO x

, and NO

2

responses of the instrument. Also determine the converter efficiency of the analyzer. Refer to the calibration procedure in this manual and in the United States Code of Federal

Regulations, Title 40, Part 50, Appendix F for exact details. Ignore the recommended zero offset adjustments.

Assaying a Working NO Standard

Against a NIST-traceable NO

Standard

Use the following procedure to calculate the NO concentration standard and NO

2

impurity.

1. Generate several NO concentrations by dilution of the NO working standard.

2. Use the nominal NO concentration, [NO]

NOM

, to calculate the diluted concentrations.

3. Plot the analyzer NO response (in ppm) versus the nominal diluted

NO concentration and determine the slope, S

NOM

.

4. Calculate the [NO] concentration of the working standard, [NO]

STD

, from:

[NO

]

STD

= [NO

]

NOM x

S

NOM

5. If the nominal NO concentration of the working standard is unknown, generate several NO concentrations to give on-scale NO responses.

6. Measure and record the NO gasflow and total flow, F

NO

and F

T

, for each NO concentration generated.

7. Plot the analyzer NO response versus F

NO

/F

T

and determine the slope which gives [NO]

STD

directly. The analyzer NO x

responses to the


Calibration

Equipment Required generated NO concentrations reflect any NO

2

impurity in the NO working standard.

8. Plot the difference between the analyzer NO x

and NO responses versus

F

NO

/F

T

. The slope of this plot is [NO

2

]

IMP

.

Zero Air

A source of zero air free of contaminants should be used as described earlier in this chapter. Contaminants can cause a detectable response on the instrument and may also react with the NO, O

3

, or NO

2

during the gas phase titration.

Dynamic Parameter

Specifications for

Gas Titrator

Use the following definitions for the remainder of this chapter.

P

R

=

[NO]

RC

= t

R

=

[NO]

STD

=

F

NO

=

F

O

=

V

RC

=

F

T

=

Dynamic parameter specification to ensure complete reaction of the available O

3

, ppm-min

NO concentration in the reaction chamber, ppm residence time of the reactant gases in the reaction chamber, min

Concentration of the undiluted NO standard, ppm

NO flow rate, sccm

O

3

generator air flow rate, sccm

Volume of the reaction chamber, cc

Analyzer demand plus 10 to 50% excess

The O

3

generator (ozonator) airflow rate and the NO flow rate must be adjusted such that the following relationships hold:

P

R

= [NO

]

RC x t

R



2.75

ppm min

[NO

]

RC

= [NO

]

STD

F

NO

(

F

O

+

F

NO

) t

R

=

V

RC

F

O

+

F

NO

< 2 min

Determining GPT System

Flow Conditions

Use the following procedure to determine the flow conditions to be used in the GPT system.



Calibration

Equipment Required

1. Determine F

T

, the total flow required at the output manifold, which should be equal to the analyzer demand plus 10 to 50 percent excess.

2. Establish [NO]

OUT

as the highest NO concentration that will be required at the output manifold. [NO]

OUT

should be about equal to

90% of the upper range limit (URL) of the NO

2

concentration range to be covered.

3. Determine F

NO

as:

F

NO

=

[NO

]

OUT

[NO

] x

STD

F

T

4. Select a convenient or available reaction chamber volume. Initially a trial volume may be selected in the range of 200 to 500 cc.

5. Compute F

O

as:

F

O

=

[NO ]

STD x

F

NO x

V

RC

-

F

NO

2.75

6. Compute t

R

as: t

R

=

V

RC

F

O

+

F

NO

7. Verify that t

R

< 2 minutes. If not, select a reaction chamber with a smaller V

RC

.

8. Compute the diluent air flow rate as:

F

D

=

F

T

-

F

O

-

F

NO

9. If F

O

turns out to be impractical for the desired system, select a reaction chamber having a different V

RC

and recompute F

D

and F

O

.


Calibration

Equipment Required

Connect GPT Apparatus to the Analyzer

Use the following procedure to connect the GPT apparatus to the analyzer.

1. Assemble a dynamic calibration system such as the one shown in Figure

4–1 .

2. Ensure that all flow meters are calibrated under the conditions of use against a reliable standard, such as a soap-bubble meter or wet-test meter. All volumetric flow rates should be corrected to 25 °C and 760 mmHg.

3. Precautions should be taken to remove O

2

and other contaminants from the NO pressure regulator and delivery system prior to the start of calibration to avoid any conversion of NO to NO

2

. Failure to do so can cause significant errors in calibration. This problem can be minimized by: a. Carefully evacuating the regulator after the regulator has been connected to the cylinder and before opening the cylinder valve. b. Thoroughly flushing the regulator and delivery system with NO after opening the cylinder valve. c. Not removing the regulator from the cylinder between calibrations unless absolutely necessary.

4. Connect the analyzer sample bulkhead input to the output of the GPT system.

5. Determine the GPT flow conditions required to meet the dynamic parameter specifications as indicated in “ Dynamic Parameter

Specifications for Gas Titrator ” earlier in this chapter.

6. Adjust the GPT diluent air and O

3

generator air flows to obtain the flows determined in “ Dynamic Parameter Specifications for Gas

Titrator ” earlier in this chapter. The total GPT airflow must exceed the total demand of the analyzer. The Model 17i requires approximately

700 cc/min of sample flow, and a total GPT airflow of at least 1.5 liters/min is recommended.


Calibration

Pre-Calibration

Pre-Calibration

Perform the following pre-calibration procedure before calibrating the

Model 17i. For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures, see the “ Operation ” chapter.

Note The calibration and calibration check duration times should be long enough to account for the transition (purge) process when switching from sample to zero and from zero to span. This transition time is the time required to purge the existing air from the sample lines, external converter, and analyzer. ▲

Depending on the plumbing configuration and the instrument, data from approximately the first minute of a zero calibration or check should be disregarded because of residual sample air. Also, data from approximately the first minute of a span calibration or check should be disregarded because the span is mixing with the residual zero air. ▲

1. Allow the instrument to warm up and stabilize.

2. Be sure the ozonator is ON. If the ozonator is not ON: a. Press to display the Main Menu, then choose Instrument

Controls > Ozonator. b. Press c. Press

to toggle the ozonator ON.

to return to the Run screen.

3. Be sure the instrument is in the auto mode, that is, NO, NO

2

, NO x

,

NH

3

, and N t

measurements are being displayed on the front panel display. If the instrument is not in auto mode: a. Press to display the Main Menu, then choose Instrument

Controls > Auto/Manual Mode. b. Select NO/NOx/Nt, and press c. Press

.


4. Select the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

ranges. For more information about the ranges and custom ranges, see the “ Operation ” chapter. a. Press to display the Main Menu, then choose Range > NO

Range, NO2 Range, NOx Range, NH3 Range, Nt Range, or Set

Custom Ranges.


Calibration

Calibration b. Select concentration range, and press c. Press to return to the Run screen.

.

5. Select the AVG soft key to display the Averaging Time screen. It is recommended that a higher averaging time be used for best results. For more information about the averaging time, see the “ Operation ” chapter. a. Press

Time.

to display the Main Menu, then choose Averaging b. Select 300, and press c. Press

.


Note The averaging time should be less than the zero duration and less than the span duration. ▲

6. Verify that any filters used during normal monitoring are also used during calibration.

7. If required, connect the analog/digital outputs, serial port, or Ethernet port to a strip chart recorder(s) or PC(s).

Calibration

The following procedure calibrates the analyzer using the gas phase titrator and zero gas generator described previously in this manual. It is suggested that a calibration curve have at least seven points between the zero and full scale NO concentrations. Although the seven-point curve is optional, two of whatever number of points is chosen should be located at the zero and

80% levels and the remaining points equally spaced between these values.

Note When the instrument is equipped with internal zero/span and sample valves, the ZERO and SPAN ports should give identical responses to the

SAMPLE port when test gases are introduced. The user should calibrate the instrument using the SAMPLE port to introduce the zero and span gas sources. After calibration, the zero and span sources should be plumbed to the appropriate ports on the rear panel of the instrument, and then reintroduced to the instrument. The instrument should give identical responses to the test gases whether they are introduced via the SAMPLE port or the ZERO or SPAN ports. If not, the plumbing and/or valves should be serviced.

▲



Calibration

Calibration

Set NO, NO x

, and N t

Backgrounds to Zero

1. Set the NO, NO x

, and N t

backgrounds to zero.

The NO, NO x

, and N t

background corrections are determined during zero calibration. The background signal is the combination of electrical offsets, PMT dark current, and trace substances undergoing chemiluminescence. For more detailed information, see “ Calibrate NO,

NOx and Nt Backgrounds ” in the “ Operation ” chapter.

The NO, NO x

, and N t

background screens operate the same way, therefore, the following procedure also applies to the NO x

and N t background screens.

For detailed information about the menu parameters and the icons used in these procedures, see the “ Operation ” chapter. a. Introduce zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead of the converter module and allow the analyzer to sample zero air until the NO,

NO x

, N t

, NO

2

, and NH

3

responses stabilize. b. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu choose

Calibration > Calibrate NO Background. c. Press to set the NO background to zero. d. Press to return to the Calibration menu and repeat steps b through d, selecting Cal NOx Background to set the NO x background to zero and Cal Nt Background to set the N t background to zero. e. Record the stable zero air responses as Z

NO

, Z

NOX

, Z

Nt

, Z

NO2

, and

Z

NH3

(recorder response, percent scale).

Note The NO channel should be calibrated first and then calibrate the

NO x

channel, then the N t

channel. ▲

Calibrate NO

2. Calibrate the NO channel to the NO calibration gas. a. Disconnect the source of zero air from the SAMPLE bulkhead. In its place, connect a source of NO calibration gas of about 80% of the full-scale range. b. Allow the analyzer to sample the NO calibration gas until the NO,

NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

readings stabilize. c. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu, choose

Calibration > Cal NO Coefficient.


Calibration

Calibration

The NO line of the Calibrate NO screen displays the current NO concentration. The SPAN CONC line of the display is where you enter the NO calibration gas concentration. d. Set the NO calibration gas concentration to the NO concentration.

Use the cursor.

to move the cursor left and right and use

to increment and decrement the numeric character at e. Press to calculate and save the new NO coefficient based on the entered span concentration. The exact NO concentration is calculated from:

[NO

]

OUT

=

F

NO x

NO

STD

F

NO

+

F

O

+

F

D

Where:

[NO]

OUT

= Diluted NO concentration at the output manifold, ppm

NO

STD

= No feed concentration

F

NO

= No flow

F

O

= Ozone flow

F

D

= Dilution flow

The NO recorder response will equal:

Recorder R esponse (% scale) =

[NO

]

OUT x

URL

100 +

Z

NO

Where:

URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NO channel, ppm f. Record the [NO]

OUT

concentration and the analyzer NO response as indicated by the recorder response.

Calibrate NO x

3. Calibrate the NO x

channel to the NO x

calibration gas. a. Press to return to the Calibration menu, and choose Cal

NOx Coefficient. b. Verify that the NO x

calibration gas concentration is the same as the

NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO

2

impurities. c. Set the NO x

calibration gas concentration to the NO x concentration.



Calibration

Calibration

Use the cursor.


to increment and decrement the numeric character at d. Press to calculate and save the new NO x

coefficient based on the entered span concentration. The exact NO x

concentration is calculated from:

[

NO x

]

OUT

=

F

NO x ( [NO

F

]

STD

+ [

NO

NO

+

F

O

+

F

D

2

]

IMP

)

Where:

[NO x

]

OUT

= diluted NO x

concentration at the output manifold, ppm

[NO

2

]

IMP

= concentration of NO

2

impurity in the standard NO cylinder, ppm

The NO x

recorder response will equal:


[

NO x

]

OUT

URL x 100 +

Z

NO x

Where:

URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NO x

channel, ppm e. Record the NO x

concentration and the analyzer's NO x

response.

Calibrate N t

4. Calibrate the N t

channel to the N t

calibration gas. a. Press to return to the Calibration menu, and choose Cal Nt

Coefficient. b. Verify that the N t

calibration gas concentration is the same as the

NO calibration gas concentration plus any known NO

2

impurities.

There should be no NH

3

in the NO span source used. c. Set the N t

calibration gas concentration to the N t

concentration.

Use the cursor.


to increment and decrement the numeric character at d. Press to calculate and save the new N t

coefficient based on the entered span concentration. The exact N t


[

N

t

]

OUT

=

F

NO

x ( [NO

]

STD

+ [

NO

F

NO

+

F

O

+

F

D

2

]

IMP

)

Where:


Calibration

Calibration

[N t

]

OUT

= diluted N t


[NO

2

]

IMP

= concentration of NO

2

impurity in the standard NO cylinder, ppm

The N t


Recorder Response (% scale) =

[

N

t

]

OUT

x 100 +

Z

N

t

URL

Where:

URL = Nominal upper range limit of the N t

channel, ppm e. Record the N t

concentration and the analyzer's N t

response.

Calibrate NO

2

5. Calibrate the NO

2

channel to the NO

2

calibration gas. a. Disconnect the source of NO from the converter module. In its place, connect a source of NO

2

. A known calibration source NO

2

is required to measure the NO

2

conversion efficiency of the converters in the Model 17i as well as calibrate the NO

2

channel of the analyzer. b. Adjust the O

3

generator in the GPT system to generate sufficient

O

3

to produce a decrease in the low NO concentration equivalent to about 80% of the URL of the low NO

2

range. The decrease must not exceed 90% of the low NO concentration determined in the “Calibrate Low NO x

” procedure. c. Allow the analyzer to sample the known NO

2

concentration until the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

responses stabilize. d. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu, choose

Calibration > Cal NO2 Coefficient.

The NO

2

field displays the current NO

2

concentration. The NO

2

Span Conc field is where you enter the NO

2

calibration gas concentration. e. Set the NO

2

calibration gas concentration to reflect the sum of the

NO

2

concentration generated by GPT and any NO

2

impurity.

Use the cursor.


to increment and decrement the numeric character at f. Press to calculate and save the new NO

2

coefficient based on the entered span concentration. The exact NO

2




[

NO

2

]

OUT

= ([NO ]

ORIG

[NO ]

REM

) +

F

F

NO x [

NO

+

NO

F

2

]

IMP

O

+

F

D

Where:

[NO

2

]

OUT

= diluted NO

2


[NO]

ORIG

= original NO concentration, prior to addition of O

3

, ppm

[NO]

REM

= NO concentration remaining after addition of O

3

, ppm

Calibration

Calibration

The NO

2



[

NO

2

]

OUT

URL x 100 +

Z

NO

2

Where:

URL = Nominal upper range limit of the NO

2

channel, ppm g. Record the NO

2

concentration and the analyzer's NO

2

response.

The analyzer does a single point efficiency calculation, corrects the NO

2 reading for converter inefficiency, then adds the corrected NO

2

to the

NO signal to give corrected NO x

and N t

signals.

If the analyzer calculates a NO

2

span coefficient of less than 0.96, either the entered NO

2

concentration is incorrect, the converter is not being heated to the proper temperature, the instrument needs servicing (leak or imbalance), or the converter needs replacement or servicing. The

NO

2

analog output will reflect the NO

2

concentration generated by

GPT, any NO

2

impurity, and the NO

2

zero offset.

Calibrate NH

3

6. Use the following procedures to calibrate the NH

3

channel to the NH

3 calibration gas. a. Disconnect the source of NO

2

from the converter module. In its place, connect a source of NH

3

. A known calibration source NH

3

is required to measure the NH

3

conversion efficiencies of the two converters in the Model 17i as well as calibrate the NH

3

channel of the analyzer. b. Allow the analyzer to sample the NH

3

calibration gas until the NO,

NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

readings stabilize. c. When the responses stabilize, from the Main Menu choose

Calibration > Cal NH3 Coefficient.


Calibration

Calibration

The NH

3

field displays the current NH

3

concentration. The NH

3

Span Conc field is where you enter the NH

3

calibration gas concentration. d. Set the NH

3

calibration gas concentration to the NH

3 concentration.

Use the cursor.


to increment and decrement the numeric character at e. Press to calculate and save the new NH

3

coefficient based on the entered span concentration.

The analyzer does a single point efficiency calculation, corrects the

NH

3

reading for converter inefficiency and corrects the NO

2

reading for any low temperature NH

3

conversion.

If the analyzer calculates a NH

3

span coefficient of less than 0.80, either the entered NH

3

concentration is incorrect, the converter is not being heated to the proper temperature, the instrument needs servicing (leak or imbalance), or the converter needs replacement or servicing. The

NH

3

analog output will reflect the NH

3

concentration.

Note You can change the calibration factors by using the Calibration

Factors menu. This is often useful in a troubleshooting situation. However, after the above calibration procedure is completed, all subsequent data reduction depends on the calibration parameters remaining the same as during the initial calibration. Therefore, never change any calibration factor without first recording the value so that after any troubleshooting procedure is completed, the initial value can be re-entered thereby not altering the multipoint calibration. ▲

Alternative Calibration

Procedure Using NO

2

/NH

3

Permeation Tube

Although it is recommended that a GPT system be used to calibrate the analyzer, the procedure described in the United States Code of Federal

Regulations, Title 40, Part 50, Appendix F using a NO

2

permeation tube may be used as an alternative procedure for calibrating the NO

2

channel.

Alternately, a NH

3

permeation tube may also be used to calibrate the NH

3 channel.


Calibration

Calibration in Dual Range and Auto Range Mode

Calibration in Dual

Range and Auto

Range Mode

The dual/auto range calibration feature is used to calibrate the analyzer at two different span levels (as opposed to a single span level in the standard mode) generating a “tailored multi-point” calibration curve stored in the analyzer's memory. This feature may be used:

●

When widely different gas levels are being monitored, such as a factor of 10 or greater apart

●

●

If precision and span levels are being introduced using separate tanks

If more than one multi-component cylinder is being used to calibrate the instrument

Properly designed chemiluminescence analyzers are inherently linear over a wide dynamic range; and under normal USEPA compliance situations this feature is not required. Dual calibration may be used for span levels less than a factor of 10 apart, however if this is done to correct for a significant non-linearity, it may mask the problems causing the effect, such as, bad calibration cylinder, leaks in sampling lines, or low ozonator output.

Use the following procedure to calibrate the analyzer in dual or auto range mode.

Set NO, NO x

, and N t

Backgrounds to Zero

1. Follow the “Set the NO, NO x

, and N t

backgrounds to zero” procedure described previously in “ Calibration ”.

Calibrate Low NO, NO x

, and N t

2. Follow the “Calibrate NO, NO x

, and N t

” procedure described previously in “ Calibration ” selecting Cal Lo NO Coeficient to calibrate the low NO channel to the low NO calibration gas, Cal Lo

NOx Coefficient to calibrate the low NO x

channel to the low NO x calibration gas, and Cal Lo Nt Coefficient to calibrate the low N t channel to the low N t

calibration gas.

Calibrate Low NO

2

3. Follow the “Calibrate NO2” procedure described previously in

“ Calibration ” selecting Cal Lo NO2 Coefficient to calibrate the low

NO

2

channel to the low NO

2

calibration gas.

Calibrate Low NH

3

4. Follow the “Calibrate NH3” procedure described previously in

“ Calibration ” selecting Cal Lo NH3 Coefficient to calibrate the low

NH

3

channel to the low NH

3

calibration gas.


Calibration

Zero and Span Check

Calibrate High NO, NO x

, and N t

5. Follow the “Calibrate NO, NO x

, and N t

” procedure described previously in “ Calibration ” selecting Cal Hi NO Coeficient to calibrate the high NO channel to the high NO calibration gas, Cal Hi NOx

Coefficient to calibrate the high NO x

channel to the high NO x calibration gas, and Cal Hi Nt Coefficient to calibrate the high N t channel to the high N t

calibration gas.

Calibrate High NO

2

6. Follow the “Calibrate NO

2

” procedure described previously in

“ Calibration ” selecting Cal Hi NO2 Coefficient to calibrate the high

NO

2

channel to the high NO

2

calibration gas.

Calibrate High NH

3

7. Follow the “Calibrate NH

3

” procedure described previously in

“ Calibration ” selecting Cal Hi NH3 Coefficient to calibrate the high

NH

3

channel to the high NH

3

calibration gas.

Note The low channels should be calibrated first and then the high channels, due to conditioning of the measurement system with NH

3

. ▲

Zero and Span Check

The analyzer requires initial and periodic calibration according to the procedures outlined in this manual. Initially, the frequency of the calibration procedure should be determined by the stability of the zero and span checks, which may be run daily. You should generate a new calibration curve when zero and span checks indicate a shift in instrument gain of more than 10 percent from that determined during the most recent multipoint calibration. You can adjust the frequency of calibration and even zero and span checks appropriately as you gain confidence with the instrument.

You should have a quality control plan where the frequency and the number of points required for calibration can be modified on the basis of calibration and zero and span check data collected over a period of time.

Use the following procedure to perform a zero and span check.

1. Connect the zero gas to the SAMPLE bulkhead in a standard instrument or to the ZERO bulkhead in a Model 17i equipped with the zero/span and sample solenoid valve option.

2. Allow the instrument to sample zero gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO, NO x

, N t

, NO

2

, and NH

3

channels then record the zero readings. Unless the zero has changed by more than ±0.010 ppm, it is recommended that the zero not be adjusted. If an adjustment


Calibration

Zero and Span Check larger than this is indicated due to a change in zero reading, the instrument should be re-calibrated.

3. Attach a supply of known concentration of NO, NO

2

(usually generated via an NIST traceable NO working standard and a GPT system), and NH

3

to the SAMPLE bulkhead (or SPAN bulkhead for instruments equipped with the zero/span and sample solenoid valve option) on the rear panel.

4. Allow the instrument to sample the calibration gas until a stable reading is obtained on the NO, NO x

, N t

, NO

2

, and NH

3

channels. If the calibration has changed by more than



10%, the instrument should be re-calibrated.

5. When the calibration check has been completed, record the NO, NO x

,

N t

, NO

2

, and NH

3

values.

6. Reconnect the analyzer sample line to the SAMPLE bulkhead.


Chapter 5

Preventive Maintenance

This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation. Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly, you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined.

This chapter includes the following maintenance information and replacement procedures:

●

“ Safety Precautions ” on page 5-1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

“ Replacement Parts ” on page 5-2

“ Cleaning the Outside Case ” on page 5-2

“ Visual Inspection and Cleaning ” on page 5-2

“ Ozonator Air Feed Drying Column Replacement ” on page 5-2

“ Capillary Inspection and Replacement ” on page 5-2

“ Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement ” on page 5-4

“ Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning ” on page 5-6

“ Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning ” on page 5-6

“ Pump Rebuilding ” on page 5-7

Safety Precautions

Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter.

WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired

Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings. ▲

Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component. For more information about appropriate safety precautions, see the “ Servicing ” chapter. ▲



Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts

See the “ Servicing ” chapter for a list of replacement parts.

Cleaning the Outside

Case

Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case.

Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case. ▲

Visual Inspection and

Cleaning

The instrument should be inspected occasionally for obvious visible defects, such as loose connectors, loose fittings, cracked or clogged Teflon® lines, and excessive dust or dirt accumulation. Dust and dirt can accumulate in the instrument and can cause overheating or component failure. Dirt on the components prevents efficient heat dissipation and may provide conducting paths for electricity. The best way to clean the inside of the instrument is to first carefully vacuum all accessible areas and then blow away the remaining dust with low pressure compressed air. Use a soft paint brush or cloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Ozonator Air Feed

Drying Column

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator air feed drying column.

1. Remove the drying column from the connector DRY AIR bulkhead on the rear panel of the instrument.

2. Replace spent absorbent material (indicating Drierite or silica gel) with new or regenerated material.

3. Reinstall the drying column to the DRY AIR bulkhead.

4. Perform a Zero/Span check (see the “ Calibration ” chapter).

Capillary Inspection and Replacement

The capillary normally only requires inspection when instrument performance indicates that there may be a flow problem. This may also be performed on a three month basis as part of a PM schedule.



Capillary Inspection and Replacement


Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the capillary inside the analyzer.

1. Turn the analyzer, converter, and pump OFF and unplug the power cords.

2. Remove the instrument cover.

3. Locate the reaction chamber/capillary holder. See Figure 5-1 and

Figure 7-2.


Cajon Fitting

Capillary

Capillary O-Ring

Reaction Chamber Front

Figure 5–1. Inspecting and Replacing the Capillaries

4. Remove the Cajon® fitting(s) from the reaction chamber body using a

5/8-inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O-ring.



Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement

5. Remove the glass capillary, ferrule, and O-ring. Inspect O-ring for cuts or abrasion, and replace as necessary.

6. Check capillary for particulate deposits. Clean or replace as necessary.

7. Replace capillary in reaction chamber body, making sure the O-ring is around the capillary before inserting it into the body.

8. Replace Cajon® fitting. Note that the Cajon® fitting should be tightened slightly more than hand tight.

9. Reconnect tubing to top of fitting, being careful to insert ferrule and

O-ring properly, and tighten knurled nut finger tight.

10. Re-install the cover.

11. Connect the power cord and turn the instrument ON.

Converter Capillaries

Inspection and

Replacement

Use the following procedure to inspect and replace the converter capillaries.

1. Turn the analyzer, converter, and pump OFF and unplug the power cords.

2. Remove the cover of the converter module.

3. Locate the heated capillary holder ( Figure 5–2 ).



Converter Capillaries Inspection and Replacement


Cajon Fitting

Capillary

Capillary O-Ring

Heated Capillary Holder

Figure 5–2. Inspecting and Replacing the Converter Capillaries

4. Remove the Cajon® fitting(s) from the holder using a 5/8-inch wrench being careful not to lose the ferrule or O-ring.

5. Remove the glass capillaries, ferrule, and O-ring. Inspect O-ring for cuts or abrasion, and replace as necessary.

6. Check capillary for particulate deposits. Clean or replace as necessary.

7. Replace capillary in holder, making sure the O-ring is around the capillary before inserting it into the body.

8. Replace Cajon® fitting. Note that the Cajon® fitting should be tightened slightly more than hand tight.

9. Reconnect tubing to top of fittings, being careful to insert ferrule and

O-ring properly, and tighten knurled nut finger tight.

10. Re-install the cover.



Thermoelectric Cooler Fins Inspection and Cleaning


Thermoelectric Cooler

Fins Inspection and

Cleaning

Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the thermoelectric cooler fins.


1. Turn the instrument off and unplug the power cord.

2. Remove the analyzer cover.

3. Locate the PMT cooler ( Figure 7–2 and Figure 7–8 ).

4. Blow off the cooler fins using clean pressurized air. It may be more convenient to vacuum the cooler fins. In either case, make sure that any particulate accumulation between the fins has been removed.

5. If necessary, use a small brush to remove residual particulate accumulation.

6. Replace the cover.


Fan Filters Inspection and Cleaning

Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filters.

1. Remove the two fan guards from the fans on the back of the analyzer and the one fan guard from the fan on the back of the converter and remove the filters.

2. Flush the filters with warm water and let dry (a clean, oil-free purge will help the drying process) or blow the filters clean with compressed air.


3. Re-install the filters and fan guards.

Mounting Screws (4)

Filter

Fan Guard


Pump Rebuilding

Figure 5–3. Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters

Pump Rebuilding

Use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 5–4 . To replace the pump, see “ Pump Replacement ” in the “ Servicing ” chapter.

Equipment Required:

Pump Repair Kit (two repair kits required per pump)

Allen Wrench, 3 mm and 4 mm

Wrench, 9/16-inch

Needlenose Pliers


1. Turn instrument off, unplug the power cords from the analyzer, converter, and pump, and disconnect the pump plumbing from the instrument.

2. Note the orientation of the pump head top plate for later reassembly.

Using a 3 mm Allen wrench, remove the eight socket head screws and washers securing the pump head top plate.



Pump Rebuilding

3. Discard the old Teflon gasket.

4. Note the orientation of the diaphragm head for later reassembly.

Remove the diaphragm head. Using a 4 mm Allen wrench, remove the four socket head screws securing the diaphragm head to the pump body.

5. Insert the tips of blunt needlenose pliers in the dimples of the clamping disk, then loosen and remove the clamping disk.

6. Remove and discard the old Teflon gasket.

7. Insert the clamping disk into the new Teflon diaphragm (three pieces) and screw the clamping disk into the pump. Do not over tighten.

8. Remove the screw and nut securing the flapper valves and remove and discard old flapper valves.

9. Install the new flapper: check that the screw head and not the washer is on the smooth side of the pump, and check that the flappers are completely flat and straight.

10. Align the diaphragm head correctly as noted in Step 2, and secure with the four socket head screws.

11. Place the new Teflon gasket over the pump head so that the eight screws holes are aligned.

12. Replace the top plate and secure with the eight screws and washers being sure that the Teflon gasket stays in place.

13. Reconnect the plumbing to the instrument and plug in the pump power cord.

14. Check that the reaction chamber pressure reads between 100 mmHg.



Pump Rebuilding


Figure 5–4. Rebuilding the Pump


Chapter 6

Troubleshooting

This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability. In the event of problems or failure, the troubleshooting guidelines, board-level connection diagrams, connector pin descriptions, and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems.

For additional fault location information refer to the “ Preventive

Maintenance ” chapter in this manual.

The service mode in the “ Operation ” chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems.

The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems. See “ Service Locations ” on page 6-

27 for contact information. In any correspondence with the factory, please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument.

This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information:

●

●

●

●

●


“ Troubleshooting Guides ” on page 6-1

“ Board-Level Connection Diagrams ” on page 6-9

“ Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-11

“ Service Locations ” on page 6-27


Read the safety precautions in the Preface and “ Servicing ” chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter.

Troubleshooting

Guides

The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems.

Table 6–1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem.


Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Guides


Table 6–2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition.

See “ Alarms Menu ” in the “ Operation ” chapter for detailed information.

Table 6–1. Troubleshooting - General Guide

Malfunction

Does not start up (the display backlight is off and nothing is on the display)

Possible Cause

No power or wrong power configuration

Action

Check the line to confirm that power is available and that it matches the voltage and frequency configuration of the instrument.

Main fuse is blown or missing

Bad switch or wiring connection

Unplug the power cord to the analyzer, open the fuse drawer on the back panel, and check fuses visually or with a multimeter.

Unplug the power cord to the analyzer, disconnect the switch on the front panel and check operation with a multimeter.

DC power supply failure

Check the green LED on the back edge of the power supply. If the LED is off, the supply has failed. Check 24V output using a multimeter. distribution failure

Display failure

PWR" on the motherboard, interface board, and converter interface board. If lit, power is OK.

If possible, check instrument function through RS-232 or Ethernet.

Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific Service

Department.

Check alarm screens and diagnostic voltage screens to localize fault.

Reduced response or no response to sample gas

System failure

No sample gas reaching the analyzer

Check flow and pressure readings on the

Diagnostics screens.

Check the response to a known span gas.

Span cylinder empty Check the source pressure. failure hardware to be sure that span gas is being delivered correctly. diaphragm capillary

No high voltage reaching the PMT capillary.

Check that the PMT is on.



Malfunction

Troubleshooting


Possible Cause

Faulty PMT or input board.

Action

Check that the PMT voltage is between -

700 to -1200 volts.

Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either PMT or input board. Replace faulty component. If problem still exists, check signal cables and replace measurement interface board.

No response to sample gas calibrated or calibrated improperly

No ozone reaching the reaction chamber

Disconnected or defective input or high voltage supply within their proper limits.

Check the Instrument Control menu to see if the ozonator is ON. If it is ON, check dry air supply.

Unplug power cord. Check that cables are connected properly. Check cable resistance.

Calibration coefficient outside acceptable limits of 0.5 – 2.0. calibrated

Defective ±15 volt Check supply voltages. Replace power supply.

Bad span gas

System leak

Verify quality of span gas.

Perform leak test.

Zero or Span will not stabilize. calibrator flow

Flow rate of the diluted span mix is inadequate.

Instrument is not drawing in span gas. least 1.0 LPM.

Check by-pass or atmospheric pressure vent to verify that the zero air system is providing more flow than the instrument is drawing.

Check sample Flow and Pressure readings on the Diagnostics screen.

Averaging time is not set correctly.

Use an independent flow meter to check flows at the sample inlet and exhaust bulkheads (they should match).

Perform a leak test, as described in the

“Preventive Maintenance” chapter.

Check the Averaging Time in Main Menu.

If too high, the unit will be slow to stabilize. If too low, the signal may appear noisy.


Troubleshooting



Malfunction

Calibration Drift

Possible Cause

PMT high voltage power supply failure

Dryer to ozonator depleted

Action

Check the PMT high voltage power supply voltage. This voltage should be between -

700 and -1200 volts (violet wire is positive).

Replace. fluctuations

Unstable NO, NO

2

, or NH

3

source specifications.

Replace source gases.

Plugged capillaries Clean or replace. out of capture contact factory. temperature out of capture is about 50 °C. If not, check that the thermistor on the reaction chamber is connected to the termperature control board and the heater is connected to the temperature control board. vacuum

NH

3

scrubber(s) depletion

Excessive Noise

Non-linear response

Defective or low sensitivity PMT etcetera).

Replace.

Check PMT voltage.

Unplug power cord. Remove PMT. Install known good PMT. Plug in power cord.

Check performance. board or BNC connection

Defective cooler Check cooler temperature (approximately -

3 °C).

Defective ozonator Replace ozonator assembly.

Noise pick-up by recorder or data logger

Check analog output cable shielding and grounding.

Try to localize source of noise by comparing analog signal to data collected thorugh RS-232 or Ethernet.

Incorrect calibration source

Leak in sample probe line

Verify accuracy of multipoint calibration source gas.

Check for variable dilution.



Troubleshooting


Malfunction Possible Cause

Leak within the

Model 17i

Problem with input board range switching

Defective PMT

Action

Check for loose fittings in both converter and analyzer module.

Go to Input Board Test screen (Service menu) and step through each range while the instrument samples a known stable source of gas.

Stay on the Input Board Test screen, and while holding instrument on the lowest gain, step the calibrator through gas levels.

Unplug power cord. Remove PMT. Install known good PMT. Plug in power cord.

Check performance.

Excessive response time

Partially blocked sample capillary

Instrument is not drawing in sample at normal flow rate

Clean or replace.

Check sample Flow and Pressure readings on the Diagnostics screens.

Perform a leak test.

Slow averaing time chosen

Check the averaging time screen.

Inadequate to the instrument for at least conditioning one hour.

Improper converter operation

Questionable calibration gas

Verify accuracy. temperature too high or too low (N t and NO x

converters

Low line voltage

°C for the analyzer module and 800 °C for the converter module.

Internal oxide layer of Nt converter stripped or converter not conditioned properly

Check to see if line voltage is within specifications.

Run the analyzer overnight with zero air containing oxygen. Note that the sample should contain some oxygen during normal operation so as not to strip the converter. heater converter heater.

Analog signal doesn't match expected value board failure

Software has not been configured

Recorder is loading down output

Verify that the selected analog output has been properly configured to match the data system.

Verify that the recorder or data logger input impedance meets minimum requirements..


Troubleshooting



Malfunction Possible Cause Action

Flow meter fluctuations Dirty pump diaphragm

Capillary blocked

Clean or replace pump diaphragm.

Clean or replace capillary.

Clogged sample line Inspect all sample lines.

Table 6–2. Troubleshooting - Alarm Messages

Alarm Message

Alarm - Internal Temp

Possible Cause

Check fan operation

Check fan filter

Alarm - Chamber Temp Chamber temperature below set point of 50 °C

Heater has failed

Alarm - Capillary Temp Capillary block inside external converter box below set point of 50 °C

Alarm – Cooler Temp

Heater has failed

Cooler reads 99.9 °C

Cooler does not hold set point of -3 °C

Action

Replace fan if not operating properly.

Clean or replace foam filter, refer to “Preventive

Maintenance” chapter in this manual.

Check 10K thermistor on measurement interface board, replace if bad.

Check 10K ohm thermistor, replace if bad.

Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on. If not, temperature control board could be defective.

Check connector pins for continuity.

Check 10K ohm thermistor, replace if bad.

Check temperature control board to insure the LEDs are coming on. If not, temperature control board could be defective.

Check connector pins for continuity

Verify fans are turning, replace defective fan.

Clean or replace foam fan filters.

Wait 1 hour, if cooler still reads high, check wiring and replace cooler.

Verify fans are turning, replace defective fan.



Troubleshooting


Alarm Message

Alarm - Conv. Temp

Alarm – External Conv.

Temp

Alarm - Pressure

Possible Cause

Cooler reads -99.9 °C

Converter temperature low

Action

Clean or replace foam fan filters.

Replace cooler – thermoelectric module inside cooler failed.

Check cooler cabling, replace thermistor.

Molybdenum converter case should be hot to the touch, if not the heater may have failed.

Check that converter temp. set point is approximately 325 °C.

Check that Converter Heater LED on temperature control board is on, if not check connections to measurement interface board and replace temperature control board.

Check that voltage to the heater is 115 VAC.

Check heater connector pins for continuity.

External converter temperature low

NH

3

converter case should be extremely hot to the touch, if not the heater may have failed.

Check the external converter temp. set point is approximately

750 °C.

Check that Converter Heater LED on temperature control board is on, if not check connections to converter interface board and replace temperature control board.

Check that voltage to the heater is 115 VAC.

Check heater connector pins for continuity.

Pressure high Check tubing going to pressure sensor.

Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm, replace with pump repair kit if necessary. Refer to

“Preventive Maintenance” chapter in this manual.

Check that capillaries are properly installed and O-rings are in good shape. Replace if necessary.


Troubleshooting


Alarm Message

Alarm - Flow

Possible Cause

Pressure low

Flow low

Flow high

Action

Check plumbing for leaks.

Check electrical cabling between pressure sensor and measurement interface board.

Replace pressure sensor.

Check sample capillaries in the converter (0.010 inch ID) for blockage. Replace as necessary.

If using sample particulate filter make sure it is not blocked.

Disconnect sample particulate filter from the sample bulkhead, if flow increases, replace the filter.

When delivering zero air or gas to the instrument, use an atmospheric dump.

Alarm – Ozonator Flow

Alarm - Zero Check

Alarm - Span Check

Ozone flow low Check ozone capillary in the analyzer (0.010 inch ID) for blockage. Replace as necessary.

Instrument out of calibration Recalibrate instrument.

Alarm - Zero Autocal

Alarm - Span Autocal

Alarm – NO, NO

2

, NO x

,

NH

3

, N t

Conc.

Instrument out of calibration Check gas supply. Perform manual calibration.

Concentration has exceeded range limit

Concentration low

Check to insure range corresponds with expected value. If not select proper range.

Check user-defined low set point, be sure the min trigger is set as desired.

Alarm - Motherboard

Status

Alarm - Interface

Status

Alarm - I/O Exp Status

Alarm – Ext Converter

Status

Internal cables not connected properly

Board is defective

Check that all internal cables are connected properly. Check that

15-pin cable between analyzer and converter is connected correctly. Recycle AC power to analyzer. If still alarming, change board.


Troubleshooting

Board-Level Connection Diagrams

Board-Level

Connection

Diagrams

Figure 6–1 through Figure 6–3 are board-level connection diagrams for the common electronics, measurement system, and external converter. These illustrations can be used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table

6–3 through Table 6–11 to troubleshoot board-level faults.

EXPANSION I/O

25 Pin

I/O EXPANSION

BOARD

J1

DIGITAL

OUTPUTS

37 Pin

DIGITAL OUTPUT

BOARD

J2

RS232/RS485

RS232/RS485

9 Pi n

9 Pin

P1:A

P1:B

10 -

BASE

T

8 Pin

J2

EXPANSION RS485

15 Pin

J15

ANALOG OUTPUTS

/DIGITAL INPUTS

37 Pin

J5

REAR PANEL

AC INPUT

AC

3 Cond

11 Pin

J14

8 Pin

J3

MOTHER BOARD

J18

34 Pin

TO MEASUREMENT SYSTEM

J4

8 Pin

SPARE DATA

J1

3 Pin

J10

2 Pin

PJ1 PJ3

3 Pin

3 Pin

PJ2

3 Pin

J17

2 Pin

DATA

AC

J1

FRONT

PANEL

BOARD

J2

14 Pin

J4

3 Pin

J3

8 Pin

POWER_GOOD

24VDC

POWER SUPPLY

LCD

DISPLAY

KEY PANEL

IPJ8

3 Pin

24VDC

P1

2 Pin

FRON T PANEL

POWER SW

AC

PJ6

3 Pin TRANSFORMER

(90VAC or 240VAC

OPTIONS)

Figure 6–1. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Common Electronics


Troubleshooting

Board-Level Connection Diagrams

MJ8

10 Pin

J2

INPUT BOARD

J1

Coax

2 Cond

PMT ANODE

PMT HV PS

MJ10

7 Pin 2 Cond

PMT

TO COMM ON ELECTRONICS

CHAMBER PRESSURE

MJ3

4 Pin

J1

3 Pin

DATA

IPJ8

MEASUREMENT

INTERFACE BOARD

MJ15

5 Pin

MJ14

3 Pin

OJ1

2 Pin

PJ7

4 Pin

MJ9

2 Pin

POJ1

2 Pin

POJ3

4 Pin

PJ3

24VDC

2 Pin

AC

3 Pin

P1

PJ6

SAMPLE FLOW

OZ FLOW SW

OZONATOR

COOLER

AMBIENT TEMP. THERM.

GAS THERM.

HEATER (15V, 1W)

& OVEN THERM.

PERM OVEN

(OPTIONAL)

PJ9

PJ11

2 Pin

PJ10

2 Pin

2 Pin

PJ12

2 Pin

PJ13

2 Pin

NO/NOX SOL.

SAMPLE SOL.

ZERO/SPAN SOL.

SPARE 1 SOL.

SPARE 2 SOL.

PJ4

2 Pin

PJ5

2 Pin

FAN1

FAN2

MJ17

6 Pin

PJ8

2 Pin

J1

AC

J2

PJ1

3 Pin

AC

PUMP

TEMP

CONTROL

J3

4 Pin

J4

3 Pin

J5

2 Pin

AC

AC

BENCH HEATER (60w)

CONVERTER HEATER (90W)

CONVERTER THERMOCOUPLE

Figure 6–2. Board-Level Connection Diagram - Measurement System


To Analyzer

RS-485

+5V .4A

+24V .4A

15Pin

J2

2 Pin

J3

4 Pin

J1

I-SERIES

CONVERTER

J9

INTF

J7

BOARD

J8

5 Pin

2 Pin

2 Pin

J5

2 Pin

J6

2 Pin

J4

6 Pin

Not Used on 17i

S/C/BYP SOL.

Z/S/CAL SOL.

FAN1

Not Used on 17i

Troubleshooting

Connector Pin Descriptions

AC IN

6 Pin

J1

POWER SW

AC

J2

2 Pin

17i TEMP

CONTROL

BOARD

J3

J4

J5

4 Pin

3 Pin

2 Pin

AC

AC

BENCH HEATER

CONVERTER HEATER

CONVERTER THERMOCOUPLE

Figure 6–3. Board-Level Connection Diagram – External Converter

Connector Pin

Descriptions

The connector pin descriptions in Table 6–3 through Table 6–11 can be used along with the board-level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board-level faults.

“ Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-12

“ Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-16

“ Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram ” on page 6-19

“ I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-

21

“ Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-22

“ Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-23

“ Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-24

“ Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-25

“ Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions ” on page 6-26


Troubleshooting


Table 6–3. Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions

Connector

Label

INTF DATA

Reference

Designator

J1

Pin

1

2

3

Signal Description

Ground

+RS485 to Interface Board

-RS485 to Interface Board

10-BASE-T J2

2 (-)

3 Ethernet Input (+)

EXPANSION BD J3

6 Ethernet Input (-)

1 +5V

SPARE DATA J4

7

8

1

+RS485 to Expansion Board

-RS485 to Expansion Board

+5V


I/O J5

7

8

1

3

4

+RS485 to Spare Board

-RS485 to Spare Board

Power Fail Relay N.C. Contact

TTL Input 1

TTL Input 2



J7 SER EN

Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

11

12

14

15

17

Pin

8

9

6

7

Troubleshooting



TTL Input 5

TTL Input 7

TTL Input 8

TTL Input 10

TTL Input 13

TTL Input 15

Analog Voltage Output 1



33

34

36

27

28

29

30

31

20

21

23

24

25

1

Power Fail Relay COM

Power Fail Relay N.O. Contact

TTL Input 3

TTL Input 4

TTL Input 6

TTL Input 9

TTL Input 11

TTL Input 12

TTL Input 14

TTL Input 16




Serial Enable Jumper


Troubleshooting


Connector

Label

24V IN

Reference

Designator

J10

DIGITAL OUTPUT J14

Pin

1

1


+24V

+5V

10 Select

EXT. RS485 J15 1

2

-RS485 to Rear Panel

+RS485 to Rear Panel


24 MONITOR J17

FRONT PANEL

BD

1 24V Power Monitor

3 LCLK – LCD Signal


Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

Pin

Troubleshooting



6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

LLP – LCD Signal

LFLM – LCD Signal

LD4 – LCD Signal

LD0 – LCD Signal

LD5 – LCD Signal

LD1 – LCD Signal

LD6 – LCD Signal

LD2 – LCD Signal

LD7 – LCD Signal

LD3 – LCD Signal

LCD Bias Voltage

24

25

26

27

28

20

21

22

23

LCD_ONOFF – LCD Signal

Keypad Row 2 Input

Keypad Row 1 Input

Keypad Row 4 Input

Keypad Row 3 Input

Keypad Col 2 Select

Keypad Col 1 Select

Keypad Col 4 Select

Keypad Col 3 Select


RS232/RS485:A P1:A 1

2

3

NC

Serial Port 1 RX (-RS485 IN)

Serial Port 1 TX (-RS485 OUT)


Troubleshooting



Connector

Label

Reference

Designator


RS232/RS485:B P1:B

7

8

Serial Port 1 RTS (+RS485 OUT)

Serial Port 1 CTS (+RS485 IN)

1

2

3

NC

Serial Port 2 RX (-RS485 IN)

Serial Port 2 TX (-RS485 OUT)

AC IN

AC 24VPWR PJ2

PJ1

AC INTF BD PJ3

7

8

1

Serial Port 2 RTS (+RS485 OUT)

Serial Port 2 CTS (+RS485 IN)

AC-HOT

1 AC-HOT

1 AC-HOT

Table 6–4. Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions

Connector

Label

Reference

Designator


PRES MJ3

2

3

1

+RS485 from Motherboard

-RS485 from Motherboard

Pressure Sensor Input



Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

Pin

Troubleshooting



INPUT BD MJ8 1 +15V

6

7

Measurement Frequency Output

Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage

10 Select

AMB TEMP MJ9 1 Ambient Temperature Thermistor

HVPS MJ10 1

3

5

HV Power Supply Voltage Adjust

HV Power Supply On/Off

HV Power Supply Voltage Monitor

FLOW SW

FLOW

MJ14

MJ15

1

3

1

NC

Ozonator Flow OK Switch

Flow Sensor Input

TEMP CTRL MJ17 1 Bench Temperature Input

4

5

Converter Heater On/Off

Converter Temperature Input


Troubleshooting



Connector

Label

OZONATOR

24V IN

AC PUMP

Reference

Designator

Pin

OJ1

P1

PJ1

1

2

1

1


Ozonator Output A

Ozonator Output B

+24V

AC-HOT

FAN 1

FAN 2

AC IN

PJ4

PJ5

PJ6

1

1

1

+24V

+24V

AC-HOT

COOLER PJ7 1 Cooler

AC TEMP PJ8

4

1

Cooler On/Off Control

AC-HOT

NO/NOX SOL. PJ9

SAMPLE SOL.

Z/S SOL.

PJ10

PJ11

SPARE1 SOL.

SPARE2 SOL.

PERM OVEN

THERM

PJ12

PJ13

POJ1

1

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

1

+24V

+24V

Sample Solenoid Control

+24V

+24V

Spare 1 Solenoid Control

+24V

Spare 2 Solenoid Control

Perm Oven Gas Thermistor



Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

PERM OVEN POJ3

Pin

1

3

Troubleshooting



Perm Oven Heater On/Off

Perm Oven Thermistor

Table 6–5. Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram

Pin Signal Description Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

MOTHER BOARD J1 1 Ground

3 LCLK – LCD Signal

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

14

15

16

LLP – LCD Signal

LFLM – LCD Signal

LD4 – LCD Signal

LD0 – LCD Signal

LD5 – LCD Signal

LD1 – LCD Signal

LD6 – LCD Signal

LD2 – LCD Signal

LD7 – LCD Signal

LD3 – LCD Signal

LCD Bias Voltage

20

21

22

23

24

LCD_ONOFF – LCD Signal

Keypad Row 2 Input

Keypad Row 1 Input

Keypad Row 4 Input

Keypad Row 3 Input


Troubleshooting


Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

Pin

25

26

27

28


Keypad Col 2 Select

Keypad Col 1 Select

Keypad Col 4 Select

Keypad Col 3 Select


LCD DATA J2

KEYBOARD

LCD BACKLIGHT J4

J3

3

4

1

2

5

6

8

9

LD0_5V – LCD Signal




LCD_ONOFF_5V – LCD Signal

LFLM_5V – LCD Signal

LLP_5V – LCD Signal

LCLK_5V – LCD Signal

13

7

8

5

6

1

3

4

1

2

LCD Bias Voltage

Keypad Row 1 Input

Keypad Row 2 Input

Keypad Row 3 Input

Keypad Row 4 Input

Keypad Col 1 Select

Keypad Col 2 Select

Keypad Col 3 Select

Keypad Col 4 Select

+5V Supply



Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

Pin

Troubleshooting



Table 6–6. I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

EXPANSION I/O J1

Reference

Designator

1

2

3

Analog Voltage Input 1



5

6

7

9

10






MOTHER BD J2

13

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

23

24

25

1

Current Output Return

Current Output 1


Current Output 2


Current Output 3


Current Output 4


Current Output 5


Current Output 6

+5V


Troubleshooting


Connector

Label

Reference

Designator


7

8

+RS485 to Motherboard

-RS485 to Motherboard

Table 6–7. Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

MOTHER BD

Reference

Designator

J1 1 +5V


10 Select

DIGITAL

OUTPUTS

J2 1

8

9

6

7

10

4

5

2

3

12

13

Relay 1 Contact a

Relay 2 Contact a

Relay 3 Contact a

Relay 4 Contact a

Relay 5 Contact a

Relay 6 Contact a

Relay 7 Contact a

Relay 8 Contact a

Relay 9 Contact a

Relay 10 Contact a

Solenoid Drive Output 1



Connector

Label

Pin

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

18

19

20

21

14

15

16

17

Reference

Designator

Troubleshooting









Relay 1 Contact b

Relay 2 Contact b

Relay 3 Contact b

Relay 4 Contact b

Relay 5 Contact b

Relay 6 Contact b

Relay 7 Contact b

Relay 8 Contact b

Relay 9 Contact b

Relay 10 Contact b


Table 6–8. Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

PMT IN

Reference

Designator

J1 1 PMT Input

INTF BD J2 1 +15V


Troubleshooting



Connector

Label

Reference

Designator


6

7

Measurement Frequency Output

Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage

10 Select

Table 6–9. Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

INTERFACE

Reference

Designator

J1 1 Bench Temperature Input

AC INPUT

BENCH

J2

J3

1

1

2

4

5



AC-HOT

Bench Heater AC Output

Bench Heater AC Return

CONVERTER J4

CONV TC

SS TEMP

J5

J6 1

2

1

2

1 Ground

2 Converter Heater AC Output

3 Converter Heater AC Return

Converter Thermocouple TC

Converter Thermocouple TC+

SS Temperature Range Jumper A

SS Temperature Range Jumper B


Troubleshooting


Table 6–10. Converter Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

EXT. RS485

INTERFACE

Reference

Designator

J1 1

2

-RS485 from Analyzer

+RS485 from Analyzer


EXT. AMB TEMP J2

PRES J3

1

2

1

External Ambient Temperature

Thermocouple-Pos Input

External Ambient Temperature

Thermocouple-Neg Input

Pressure Sensor Input

TEMP CTRL J4 1 Conv Temp-Btm Input

4

5

Converter Control Output

Conv Temp-Top Input

FAN1 J5 1

FAN2 J6 1


Troubleshooting


Connector

Label

Reference

Designator

S/C/BYP J7


1 +24V

2 S/C/BYP Solenoid Control

Z/C/CAL J8 1 +24V

2 Control

FLOW J9 1 Flow Sensor Input


Table 6–11. Converter Temperature Control Board Connector Pin Descriptions


Label

INTF

Reference

Designator

J1 1 Bench Temperature Input

AC IN

BENCH

J2

J3 1

2

1

2

4

5



AC Input - A

AC Input - B

Bench Heater AC Output

Bench Heater AC Return

CONVERTER J4

CONV TC J5

J6 1

2

1

2

1 Chassis

2

3

Converter Heater AC Output

Converter Heater AC Return

Converter Thermocouple TC Neg

Converter Thermocouple TC Pos

Not Used – Do not connect

Not Used – Do not connect


Troubleshooting

Service Locations

Service

Locations

For additional assistance, service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide. Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.

1-866-282-0430 Toll Free




Chapter 7

Servicing

This chapter explains how to replace the Model 17i subassemblies. It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced.

For fault location information refer to the “ Preventive Maintenance ” chapter and the “ Troubleshooting ” chapter in this manual.

The service mode in the “ Operation ” chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems.

For additional service assistance, see “ Service Locations ” at the end of this chapter.

This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures:

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●


“ Firmware Updates ” on page 7-4

“ Accessing the Service Mode ” on page 7-4

“ Replacement Parts List ” on page 7-4

“ Cable List ” on page 7-6

“ External Device Connection Components ” on page 7-7

“ Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel ” on page 7-10

“ Pump Replacement ” on page 7-11

“ Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement ” on page 7-12

“ Fan Replacement ” on page 7-16

“ PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement ” on page

7-17

“ Photomultiplier Tube Replacement ” on page 7-19

“ PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement ” on page 7-20

“ PMT Voltage Adjustment ” on page 7-21


Servicing

Service Locations


●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

“ Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal ” on page 7-22

“ NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement ” on page 7-24

“ NH3 Converter Replacement ” on page 7-25

“ Solenoid Valve Replacement ” on page 7-27

“ Ozonator Assembly Replacement ” on page 7-28

“ Ozonator Transformer Replacement ” on page 7-30

“ Input Board Replacement ” on page 7-30

“ Input Board Calibration ” on page 7-32

“ DC Power Supply Replacement ” on page 7-32

“ Analog Output Testing ” on page 7-33

“ Analog Output Calibration ” on page 7-36

“ Analog Input Calibration ” on page 7-37

“ Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement ” on page 7-38

“ Pressure Transducer Calibration ” on page 7-39

“ Temperature Control Board Replacement ” on page 7-41

“ Ambient Temperature Calibration ” on page 7-42

“ Fuse Replacement ” on page 7-43

“ Ammonia Scrubber Replacement” on page 7-44

“ I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement ” on page 7-45

“ Digital Output Board Replacement ” on page 7-46

“ Motherboard Replacement ” on page 7-47

“ Measurement Interface Board Replacement ” on page 7-48

“ Flow Transducer Replacement ” on page 7-49

“ Flow Transducer Calibration ” on page 7-50

“ Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement ” on page 7-52

“ Converter Interface Board Replacement ” on page 7-52

“ Front Panel Board Replacement ” on page 7-54

“ LCD Module Replacement ” on page 7-55

“ Service Locations ” on page 7-56


Servicing

Safety Precautions


Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter.

WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives. ▲

If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. ▲

CAUTION Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure. Avoid contact with converter heated components. ▲

Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components. ▲

Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component ( Figure 7–1 ). If an antistatic wrist strap is not available, be sure to touch a grounded metal object before touching any internal components. When the instrument is unplugged, the chassis is not at earth ground. ▲

Handle all printed circuit boards by the edges. ▲

Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source. This can permanently damage the tube. ▲

Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module. ▲

The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it carefully. ▲

Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth, it may easily scratch the plate. ▲

Do not use alcohol, acetone, MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent. ▲


Servicing

Firmware Updates

Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases. ▲

Do not shake or jolt the LCD module. ▲

Figure 7–1. Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap

Firmware Updates

The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet. This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low-level processors. Refer to the iPort manual for the firmware update procedure.

Accessing the

Service Mode

If the Service Menu is not displayed on the Main Menu, use the following procedure to display it.

1. At the Main Menu, press press >

to scroll to Instrument Controls >

to scroll to Service Mode > and press .

The Service Mode screen appears.

2. Press

3. Press

to toggle the Service Mode to ON.

> to return to the Main Menu.

4. Return to the procedure.

Replacement Parts

List

Table 7-1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 17i major subassemblies. Refer to Figure 7–2 and Figure 7–3 to identify the component location.

Table 7–1. Model 17i Replacement Parts

Part Number

100480-00

Description

Front Panel Pushbutton Board



Part Number Description

100533-00 Motherboard

100539-00 Digital Output Board

100542-00 I/O Expansion Board (Optional)

102340-00

102496-00

101399-00

103813-00

101863-00

100536-00

Front Panel Connector Board

Front Panel Display

Analyzer Transformer, 220-240VAC (Optional)

Converter Transformer, 220-240VAC (Optional)

Analyzer Transformer, 100VAC (Optional)

Measurement Interface Board

100856-00

103729-00

101167-00

Temperature Control Board (Molybdenum Converter)

Temperature Control Board (N t

Converter)

Input Board Assembly

Servicing

Replacement Parts List

101021-00

101620-00

101024-00

101324-00

Flow Transducer (Sample)

Flow Switch (Ozone)

PMT High Voltage Power Supply

PMT Base Socket Assembly

102648-05 Reaction Chamber Assembly

101009-00 NO

2

-to-NO Converter Assembly (Molybdenum 110VAC)

9269 Molybdenum Converter Core Assembly

114449-00 NH

3

Converter Heater Assembly

10155 NH

3

Converter Core Assembly

101011-00

9267

9456

8079

9457

8500

Pump 100VAC w/Plate and Fittings

Pump Repair Kit (for 101011-00)

Pump 115VAC, 60Hz

Pump 115VAC, 50Hz

Pump 220VAC, 50Hz

Pump 220VAC, 60Hz


Servicing

Cable List

Part Number

8080

9464

Description

Pump 100VAC, 50-60Hz

Pump Repair Kit

101681-00 Power Supply Assembly, 24VDC, w/Base Plate and Screws

101905-00

101904-00

103955-00

103894-00

103246-00

101688-00

Fuse, 250VAC, 4.0 Amp, SlowBlow (for 100VAC and 110VAC analyzer models)

Fuse, 250VAC, 2.0 Amp, SlowBlow (for 220-240VAC analyzer models)

Fuse, 250VAC, 7.0 Amp, SlowBlow (for 100VAC and 110VAC converter models)

Fuse, 250VAC, 3.15 Amp, SlowBlow (for 220-240VAC converter models)

Converter Capillary Heater/Thermistor Assembly

Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor

101016-00 Ozone (Option)

10169 Ceramic Heater (Converter Module)

4119

4121

Capillary 0.008-inch ID

Capillary 0.01-inch ID

6556 Optical Filter Kit (Red Filter, Quartz Window, Rubber Washer)

Cable List

Table 7–2 describes the Model 17i cables. See the “ Troubleshooting ” chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions.

Table 7–2. Model 17i Cables

Part Number

101349-00

8926

Description

AC Power Cable (115VAC, US)

AC Power Cable (220VAC, EU)

103299-00

101036-00

Umbilical cord between analyzer and converter

DC Power Supply 24V Output

101037-00 115VAC Supply to Interface Board

101048-00 RS-485/Data


Description

AC Power Switch to Motherboard

DC Power Supply Status Monitor

Motherboard to Front Panel Board

DC Power Supply AC Input

AC from Receptacle

AC to Power Switch

Fan Power Cable

Temperature Control (analyzer and converter)

Signal Output Ribbon

Servicing

External Device Connection Components

Part Number

101038-00

101364-00

101054-00

101035-00

101033-00

101377-00

101267-00

101346-00

101355-00

101055-00

102057-00

Main AC Receptacle Assembly

AC to External Pump

103399-00 NH

3

Converter AC Power (from front panel switch to temp control board in 115V version)

101038-00 NH

3

Converter AC Power (from front panel switch to transformer in

220V version)

103694-00 NH

3

Converter AC Power (from transformer to temp control board in

220V version)

External Device

Connection

Components

Table 7–3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and data loggers to an iSeries instrument.

Table 7–3. External Device Connection Components

Part Number

102562-00

102556-00

102645-00

102646-00

102659-00

6219

102888-00

102891-00

103084-00

Description

Terminal Block and Cable Kit (DB25) (optional)

Terminal Block and Cable Kit (DB37) (optional)

Cable, DB37M to Open End Cable, Six Feet (optional)

Cable, DB37F to Open End, Six Feet (optional)

Cable, DB25M to Open End, Six Feet (optional)

Cable, RS-232 (optional)

Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB37F (standard with all instruments)

Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB37M (standard with all instruments)

Terminal Board PCB Assembly, DB25M (optional) Included with optional I/O Expansion Board in all instruments.


Servicing


Pressure Transducer

Input Board

HVPS

Thermistor

Measurement

Interface Board

Power Supply

Converter

Flow

Transducer

Flow

Switch

Reaction

Chamber

Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board

Transfomer Solenoids (4)

PMT Assembly

Figure 7–2. Analyzer Module Component Layout

Temperature

Control Board

Capillary

Fan

I/O Expansion

Board (Opt)


Heated Capillarly

Holders (3)

Servicing


NH

3

Converter

Converter Temperature

Control Board

Transformer

Ammonia Scrubbers (3)

Figure 7–3. Converter Module Component Layout

Fan

Converter

Interface Board


Servicing

Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel

Removing the

Measurement Bench and Lowering the

Partition Panel

The measurement bench can be removed and the partition panel can be lowered to improve access to connectors and components. This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module. Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel ( Figure 7–4 ).

REMOVE SCREWS

Pass Through

Connectors

Loosen

Captive

Screw

Partition Panel

Remove Screw

SLIDE BENCH OUT

Remove Screw

Remove Screws

LOWER PANEL

Remove Hidden Screw

Figure 7–4. Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition

Panel

Equipment Required:

Philips screwdriver

Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component. ▲


Servicing

Pump Replacement

1. Turn analyzer and converter OFF and unplug the power cord.

2. If the instrument is mounted in a rack, remove it from the rack.

3. Remove the cover.

4. In the analyzer, disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel and connect to the measurement interface board. In the converter, disconnect all cables connected to the converter interface board and converter temperature control board.

5. Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel.

6. Remove two screws from the left side of the case (viewed from front).

7. Remove one screw from the bottom front of the case.

8. Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel.

9. While holding the case securely, loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement bench, and pull the measurement bench from the rear of the case.

10. Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel securing the top of partition panel to the measurement bench, and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables.

11. Replace the measurement bench by following previous steps in reverse.

Pump Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the pump ( Figure 7–5 ).To rebuild the pump, see “ Pump Rebuilding ” in the “ Preventive Maintenance ” chapter.

Equipment Required:

110V pump or 220V pump

1. Disconnect the pump power line from the AC power outlet.


Servicing

Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement

Figure 7–5. Replacing the Pump

2. Remove both inlet and exhaust lines from the pump.

3. Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse.

Vacuum Pump

Diaphragm and Valve

Replacement

Use the following procedures to replace the diaphragm and valve for the vacuum pumps ( Figure 7–6 ).

Equipment Required:

●

Allen wrench, 4 mm

●

●

●

●

Nut driver, 7/32-inch or 5.5 mm

Allen wrench, 3 mm

Spanner wrench, 3.8 mm diameter by 4.5 mm long inserts

Small flat-blade screwdriver

●

●

●

●

Large flat-blade screwdriver

Cleaning agent (alcohol)

Fine-grade steel wool

“LOC-TITE” blue breakable thread adhesive


Servicing



Diaphragm Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the diaphragm ( Figure 7–6 ).

1. Undo the four socket head cap screws and washers (“C”) for each head and lift off the heads with tubing from the pump body. Keep the heads connected if at all possible: disconnecting and then reconnecting the

PTFE tube can cause leaks.

2. Check for smooth opening and closing of the reed valves (“Q”): a number of sets of diaphragms can be replaced before there is a need to replace the valves. Follow the instructions for “valve replacement” if changing of the valves is required.

3. Use the spanner wrench to loosen and remove the one-piece clamping disc/screw (“E”). Remove the old diaphragms from both heads (“G”).

4. Remove the four pan head screws with M5 washers (“J”) and remove the housing cover (“K”) from the front of the pump body. If necessary, carefully use a small flat-bladed screwdriver to pry-off the housing cover.

5. Install the two PTFE (white color) diaphragms together with one TFM

(translucent) diaphragm as shown in Figure E-1. Install with the ridges of the diaphragm convolutions as shown in the diaphragm stack crosssection inset.

6. Temporarily insert two of the head screws through the diaphragms and screw into the pump body to keep the position of the diaphragms as the clamping disc is tightened. Any stress applied re-aligning the diaphragm in the process of assembling the head will significantly reduce diaphragm life

7. Check the threads of the clamping disc to insure that they are clean and free of debris. Apply a small amount of the breakable thread adhesive to the clamping disc threads and install.


Servicing


8. Rotate the counterweight until the connecting rod is in mid-stroke and then tighten the clamping disc. Do not over tighten the clamping disc.

Note Over tightening of the clamping disc will significantly reduce diaphragm life. Tighten enough to avoid contact with the head. If a significant amount of torque is required to tighten, first re-check to see if the threads are clear, then check that the connection rod support disc (“H”) is properly seated on the connection rod. Over-torque of the clamping disc must never be a way to avoid contact with the head. ▲

9. Remove the two temporary aligning screws and re-install the heads on to the pump body. The correct head bolt torque range is 20-30 inchpounds.

10. Turn the counterweight (“M”) through at least one full revolution to check for smooth operation.

11. Re-install the housing cover and check the pump for correct performance.

Valve Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the valve.

1. With the head off the pump, unscrew the socket head cap screws with

M4 lock washers (“S”) to remove the head lid (“T”) and gasket (“V”).

2. Loosen the single pan head screw, washers and nut (“P”) and remove the two stainless steel reed valves (“Q”). If necessary, hold the nut in place with a nut-driver.

3. Lightly clean the valve seat area of debris or deposits with fine-grade steel wool. This area must be clean and smooth, without pits or scratches. Do not scratch the head plate. Finish the cleaning with alcohol and then air-dry the parts.

4. Lay the two replacement reed valves on a flat surface to the direction of any slight bend.

5. Lay the replacement reed valves in place, center bowed out (see valve installation), and tighten the pan head screw, both washers, and the nut. Be certain that the reed valves lay straight and smooth with


Servicing

Vacuum Pump Diaphragm and Valve Replacement clearance from the recessed edge to prevent sticking. If a reed valve curves away from the valve hole, remove the screw, flip the valve over and reinstall.

6. Match the holes of the PTFE head gasket (“V”) with the head seal surface, install the head lid, and tighten the two center bolts with M4 lock washers first and then cross alternate tightening of the perimeter bolts. Re-tighten the two center bolts after the other bolts are tight.

Diaphragm

Installation


Figure 7–6. Vacuum Pump – Head Plate and Motor View

Valve

Installation


Servicing

Fan Replacement

Fan Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the fan. This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module ( Figure 7–7 ).

Equipment Required:

Fan

Philips screwdriver


1. Turn instrument or converter OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

2. Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter.

3. Pull the power connectors off the fan.

4. Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan.

5. Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse.

Mounting Screws (4)

Filter

Fan Guard

Figure 7–7. Replacing the Fan


Servicing

PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement

PMT Cooler and


Assembly

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the PMT cooler and reaction chamber assembly (see Figure 7–8 ).

Equipment Required:

PMT cooler

Wrench, 7/16-inch

Wrench, 9/16-inch

Nut driver, 1/4-inch

Philips screwdriver

Wire cutters


1. Refer to “ Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the

Partition Panel ” in this chapter to lower the partition panel, then proceed to the next step below.

2. Disconnect the reaction chamber connector from the temperature control board.

3. Snap off the temperature control board from the board mounts.

4. Remove the four screws securing the cooler shroud to the rear panel and remove the shroud.


Servicing

PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber Assembly Replacement


Temperature Control Board

Cooler Shroud

Reaction Chamber

BNC Connectorto

Input Board

To PMT HVPS

Captive Screws (4)

(Two Not Shown)

Figure 7–8. PMT Cooler and Reaction Chamber

To BENCH on

Temp. Control Board

To COOLER on Measurement

Interface Board

5. Disconnect plumbing connections from the reaction chamber.

6. Disconnect the cables from the PMT high voltage power supply, the input board, and the measurement interface board. Remove all tiewraps securing the cables.

7. Loosen four captive screws holding cooler to floor plate and remove the cooler assembly with the reaction chamber.

Note If only the cooler is being replaced, remove the PMT and reaction chamber from the old cooler and install them on the new cooler. ▲

8. Install new cooler by following previous steps in reverse.

Note Fasten knurled fittings on reaction chamber finger tight. ▲

Make sure that the heat shrink covered tubing between the reaction chamber and the converter is light tight at the connections. ▲


Servicing

Photomultiplier Tube Replacement

9. Re-install the measurement bench. Refer to “ Removing the

Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel ” in this chapter.

Photomultiplier Tube

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the PMT tube.

Equipment Required:

Photomultiplier tube and PMT base


Flat blade screwdriver

Philips screwdriver, small


1. Turn instrument OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

2. Disconnect the high voltage cable from the PMT power supply and unplug the BNC cable from the Input Board.

3. Remove six external screws holding PMT cover plate and the four screws holding the PMT shroud to the panel and remove the PMT cover plate ( Figure 7–9 ). If the cooler fan is attached, unplug the fan power cord if necessary.

PMT Cover Plate Screws (6)

PMT Shroud Screws (4)

PMT Base Screws (3)

PMT Base Assembly


Figure 7–9. Replacing the PMT


Servicing

PMT High Voltage Power Supply Replacement

4. Remove the three retaining screws holding PMT base assembly to the cooler using a 5/16-inch nut driver.

Equipment Damage Do not point the photomultiplier tube at a light source. This can permanently damage the tube.

▲

5. Pull the PMT and PMT base from cooler assembly by twisting it slightly back and forth.

6. To install PMT, follow previous steps in reverse making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to replacing the PMT.

7. Perform a photomultiplier tube calibration. See “ PMT Voltage

Adjustment ” in the “ Operation ” chapter.

PMT High Voltage

Power Supply

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the PMT high voltage power supply

( Figure 7–10 ).

Equipment Required:

PMT high voltage power supply


Philips screwdriver



2. Disconnect the two PMT high voltage supply cables.

3. Loosen the two retaining screws securing the assembly bracket to the floor plate and slide the assembly towards the rear slightly and lift it off the base screws.

4. Loosen two screws on the input box assembly and lift the input box assembly off the power supply.


Servicing

PMT Voltage Adjustment

5. Remove the four screws securing the power supply to the bracket and remove the power supply.

Assembly Bracket

HVPS

Input Box Screws (2)

Input Box Assembly

Assembly Bracket Screws (2)

Figure 7–10. Replacing the PMT HVPS

6. To install the power supply, follow the previous steps in reverse.

7. Recalibrate the instrument. Refer to the calibration procedures in the

“ Calibration ” chapter.

PMT Voltage

Adjustment

Use the following procedure to adjust the PMT voltage after switching from standard to extended ranges or vice versa.


1. Select the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

ranges. Refer to “ Range

Menu ” in the “ Operation ” chapter.

2. Set the NO BKG, NO x

BKG, and N t

BKG calibration factors to 0.0.

Refer to “ Calibration Factors Menu ” in the “ Operation ” chapter.


Servicing

Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal

3. Set the NO COEF, NO x

COEF, N t

COEF, NO

2

COEF, and NH

3

COEF to 1.000.

4. Set the Averaging Time to 10 seconds. Refer to “ Averaging Time ” in the “ Operation ” chapter.

5. Connect the calibration gas and allow the instrument to sample calibration gas until the reading stabilizes.

6. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service > press

to scroll to PMT Voltage Adjustment > and press .

The Set PMT Voltage screen appears.

>

Note If Service Mode is not displayed, refer to “ Accessing the Service

Mode ” on page 7-4 , then return to the beginning of this step.

▲

7. At the Set PMT Voltage screen, use to increment/decrement the counts until the instrument displays the calibration gas concentration value.


Cleaning or Removal

Use the following procedure to clean or remove the reaction chamber (see

Figure 7–11 ).

Equipment Required:

Allen Wrench, 9/64-inch

Wrench, 7/16-inch

Wrench, 9/16-inch


1. Remove PMT cooler as described in “ PMT Cooler and Reaction

Chamber Assembly Replacement ” in this chapter.

2. Disconnect all plumbing connections from the reaction chamber.

3. Remove the three socket head screws fastening front of reaction chamber to rear ( Figure 7–11 ). This exposes the inner surfaces of both



Servicing

Reaction Chamber Cleaning or Removal sections of the reaction chamber and the quartz window. To clean these surfaces use cotton swabs and methanol.

4. To continue removing rear of reaction chamber remove the three socket head screws holding it to cooler, being careful to keep quartz window and red filter in cooler body.

5. To reinstall reaction chamber, follow previous steps in reverse, making sure to backfill the cooler with dry air or nitrogen prior to installing reaction chamber.



PMT Cooler

O-Ring (2-034)

Viton Spacer

Reaction Chamber Rear

Red Filter

Quartz Window

O-Ring (2-127)

Reaction Chamber Front

Figure 7–11. Cleaning or Removing the Reaction Chamber


Servicing

NO2-to-NO Converter Replacement

NO

2

-to-NO Converter

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the NO

2

-to-NO converter ( Figure

7–12 ).

Equipment Required:

NO

2

-to-NO Converter

Wrench, 7/16-inch

Wrench, 9/16-inch

Wrench, 1/2-inch

Wrench, 5/8-inch

Screwdriver



CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components. Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components. ▲


1. Turn analyzer and converter OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

2. Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with heated components.

3. Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet.

4. Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature control board.

5. Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate.


Servicing

NH3 Converter Replacement

Moly Converter Assembly

Top Housing Assembly

Heater Assembly

Thermocouple Leads and Heater Connector

O

3

Converter

Bottom Housing Assembly

Captive Screws (4)

Figure 7–12. NO

2

-to-NO Molybdenum Converter Assembly

6. Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom half.

7. Remove the converter cartridge/heater assembly from the bottom housing assembly.

8. Loosen the heater clamp, pry heater apart no wider than necessary and remove the converter cartridge noting the proper orientation of heater wires and thermocouple probe.

9. To replace converter, follow previous steps in reverse. Note Be sure to wrap the O

3

converter tube snugly around the heater.

NH

3

Converter

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the NH

3

converter ( Figure 7–13 ).

Equipment Required:

NH

3

Converter

Wrench, 7/16-inch

Wrench, 9/16-inch


Servicing

NH3 Converter Replacement


Wrench, 1/2-inch

Wrench, 5/8-inch

Screwdriver



CAUTION Avoid contact with converter heated components. Allow converter to cool to room temperature before handling converter components.

▲


1. Turn converter OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

2. Allow converter to cool to room temperature to prevent contact with heated components. Loosen and remove the hose clamp holding thermocouple probe and converter exit plumbing together.

3. Disconnect plumbing at converter inlet and outlet.

4. Disconnect thermocouple leads and heater connector from temperature control board.

5. Loosen the four captive screws holding converter housing to floor plate.

6. Remove the six screws holding the top housing assembly to the bottom half.

7. Remove the converter cartridge/heater assembly from the bottom housing assembly.

8. Remove the converter cartridge by sliding trhough ceramic heater. Be sure to note the proper orientation of heater wires and thermocouple probe.


Top Housing Assembly

Servicing

Solenoid Valve Replacement

NH

3

Converter Heater Core Assembly

Thermocouple Leads

Bottom Housing Assembly

Captive Screws (4)

Figure 7–13. NH

3

Converter Heater Core Assembly

9. To replace converter, follow previous steps in reverse.

Solenoid Valve

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace a solenoid valve ( Figure 7–14 ).

Equipment Required:

Solenoid valve

Wrench, 5/16-inch

Philips screwdriver




2. Disconnect solenoid from the Measurement Interface board (NO/NO x connector). Note electrical connections to facilitate re-connection.


Servicing

Ozonator Assembly Replacement

3. Remove plumbing from solenoid. Note plumbing connections to facilitate re-connection.

4. Pull solenoid valve from mounting clip.

5. To replace solenoid, follow previous steps in reverse.



Solenoid Valve

Mounting Clip

Figure 7–14. Replacing the Solenoid Valve

Ozonator Assembly

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator assembly ( Figure 7–

15 ).

Equipment Required:

Ozonator assembly

Wrench, 5/8-inch

Philips screwdriver




Servicing

Ozonator Assembly Replacement



2. Carefully disconnect the plumbing at the glass inlet and outlet of the ozonator.

3. Disconnect the stainless steel tubing from the flow transducer.

4. Loosen the four captive screws securing the ozonator bracket to the floor plate.

Flow Transducer

Captive Screws (4)

Ozonator Assembly – Top View

Ozonator Bracket Screws (2)

Ozonator

Ozonator Transformer

Screws (4)

Ozonator Assembly – Front View

Figure 7–15. Replacing the Ozonator Assembly

5. Remove the two screws securing the ozonator to the ozonator bracket.


Servicing

Ozonator Transformer Replacement

6. Unplug the ozonator from the ozonator transformer by lifting the ozonator straight up.

7. To install the ozonator, follow the previous steps in reverse.



Ozonator Transformer

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the ozonator transformer ( Figure 7–

15 ).

Equipment Required:

Ozonator transformer

Philips screwdriver



2. Remove the ozonator assembly as described in “ Ozonator Assembly

Replacement ”.

3. Disconnect the plug connecting the ozonator transformer to the measurement interface board (OZONATOR connector).

4. Remove the four screws holding the ozonator transformer to the ozonator bracket and remove the ozonator transformer.

5. To install the ozonator transformer, follow the previous steps in reverse.



Input Board

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the input board ( Figure 7–16 ).

Equipment Required:

Input board



Servicing

Input Board Replacement

Philips screwdriver

Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component.

▲



2. Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon cable.

3. Loosen the two screws holding the assembly bracket to the floor plate, move the assembly towards the rear, and lift the assembly off the screws.

4. Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the assembly bracket and lift the input box off the screws.

Assembly Bracket

Input Board

Input Box Screws (2)

Input Board Screws (4)

Input Box

Assembly Bracket Screws (2)

Figure 7–16. Replacing the Input Board

5. Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse.




Servicing

Input Board Calibration

7. Perform an input board calibration. See the “ Input Board Calibration ” procedure that follows.

Input Board

Calibration

After replacing the input board, use the following procedure to calibrate the input board.



to scroll to Input Board Calibration > and press .

The Input Board Calibration screen appears.

>


Mode ” on page 7-4 , then return to the beginning of this step. ▲

2. At the Input Board Calibration screen, press

Input Cal, and press to calibrate.

The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1.

to select Manual

3. Make a note of the FREQ value displayed at GAIN 1, then press or to change the GAIN to 100.

4. At the GAIN 100 screen, use to increment the D/A counts until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above (within 50 counts) the value noted in the previous step.

5. Press to store the value.

The screen flashes Calculating - Please Wait! and Done - Values

Saved! messages.

DC Power Supply

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply ( Figure 7–

17 ).

Equipment Required:

DC power supply

Philips screwdriver


Servicing

Analog Output Testing



2. Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections. Note connector locations to facilitate re-connection.

3. Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and lift out the power supply.

Power Supply Retaining Screws (4)

BOTTOM VIEW

Captive Screw

Figure 7–17. Replacing the DC Power Supply

4. To install the DC power supply, follow the previous steps in reverse.

Analog Output Testing

The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs. To check the analog outputs, you connect a meter to an analog output channel (voltage or current) and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the

Test Analog Outputs screen.

Equipment Required:

Multimeter

Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs.


Servicing


Analog Voltage Outputs

1. Connect a meter to the channel to be tested. Figure 7–18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7–4 identifies the associated channels.

Current Outputs

Analog Voltage Inputs


Figure 7–18. Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins

2. From the Main Menu, press

>

to scroll to Diagnostics, > press

to scroll to Test Analog Outputs, and press .

The Test Analog Outputs screen appears.

3. Press to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected, and press .

The Set Analog Outputs screen appears.

4. Press to set the output to zero.

The Output Set To line displays Zero.

5. Check that the meter is displaying the zero value. If the meter reading differs by more than one percent, the analog outputs should be adjusted. Refer to the “ Analog Output Calibration ” procedure that follows.

6. Press to set the output to full-scale.

The Output Set To line displays Full-Scale.



Servicing


7. Check that the meter is displaying a full-scale value. If the meter reading differs by more than one percent, the analog outputs should be adjusted. Refer to the “ Analog Output Calibration ” procedure that follows.

8. Press to reset the analog outputs to normal.

Table 7–4. Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections

Voltage

Channel

Pin

1 14

2 33

3 15

4 34

5 17

6 36

Current

Channel

1

2

3

4

5

6

Pin

15

17

19

21

23

25

Ground 16, 18, 19, 35, 37 Current Output Return 13, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24

Table 7–5. Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections

Input Channel Pin

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 5

5 6

6 7

7 9

8 10

Ground 4, 8, 11, 14


Servicing

Analog Output Calibration

Analog Output

Calibration

Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the “ Analog Output Testing ” procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I/O expansion board.

Equipment Required:

Multimeter

1. Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate. Figure 7–18 shows the analog output pins and

Table 7–4 identifies the associated channels.


to scroll to Analog Output Calibration > and press

The Analog Output Cal screen appears.

.

>



3. At the Analog Output Cal screen, press to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected, then press .

4. With the cursor at Calibrate Zero, press

The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero

.

Note When calibrating the analog output, always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full-scale. ▲

5. Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set

Output To line (0.0 V or 0.0 or 4.0), then press to save the value.

6. Press

7. Press

to return to the previous screen.

to select Calibrate Full-Scale.

8. Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set

Output To line, then press to save the value.


Servicing

Analog Input Calibration

Analog Input

Calibration

Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I/O expansion board. These procedures include selecting analog input channels, calibrating them to zero volts, and then calibrating them to full-scale using a known voltage source.

Calibrating the Input

Channels to Zero Volts

Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts.

1. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service, press

to scroll to Analog Input Calibration, and press .

>

2. The Analog Input Cal screen displays.



3. At the Analog Input Cal screen, press press .

to scroll to a channel, and

4. With the cursor at Calibrate Zero, press .

The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel.

5. Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts.

The screen displays 0.00 V as the voltage setting.

6. Press > to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary.

7. Continue with the “ Calibrating the Input Channels to Full-Scale ” procedure that follows.

Calibrating the Input

Channels to Full-Scale

Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels.

Equipment Required:


Servicing

Pressure Transducer Assembly Replacement

DC voltage source (greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts)

1. Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel (1-8) to be calibrated. Figure 7–18 shows the analog output pins and Table 7–5 identifies the associated channels.

2. From the Main Menu, press to scroll to Service, press

to scroll to Analog Input Calibration, and press .

The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1-8.

>

3. At the Analog Input Cal screen, press selected in Step 1, and press .

to scroll to the channel

4. Press to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale, and press .

The screen displays the current input voltage for the selected channel.

5. Use and to enter the source voltage, and press to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel to the source voltage.

6. Press > to return to the input channels display and repeat

Steps 3-5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary.

Pressure Transducer

Assembly Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the pressure transducer assembly

( Figure 7–19 ).

Equipment Required:

Pressure transducer assembly

Philips screwdriver



2. Disconnect plumbing from the pressure transducer assembly. Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection.


Servicing

Pressure Transducer Calibration

3. Disconnect the pressure transducer cable.

Retaining Screws (2)

Pressure Transducer Assembly

Figure 7–19. Replacing the Pressure Transducer

4. Remove the two pressure transducer assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure transducer assembly.

5. To install the pressure transducer assembly, follow previous steps in reverse.

6. Calibrate the pressure transducer. Refer to the “ Pressure Transducer

Calibration ” procedure that follows.


Calibration

Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure transducer.

Equipment Required:

Vacuum pump

WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives.

▲

If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. ▲


Servicing

Pressure Transducer Calibration



Note An error in the zero setting of the pressure transducer does not introduce a measurable error in the output concentration reading.

Therefore, if only a barometer is available and not a vacuum pump, only adjust the span setting.

▲

A rough check of the pressure accuracy can be made by obtaining the current barometric pressure from the local weather station or airport and comparing it to the pressure reading. However, since these pressures are usually corrected to sea level, it may be necessary to correct the reading to local pressure by subtracting 0.027 mmHg per foot of altitude. ▲

Do not try to calibrate the pressure transducer unless the pressure is known accurately. ▲


2. Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg.


to scroll to Pressure Calibration > and press .

The Pressure Sensor Cal menu appears.

>



4. At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu, press

The Calibrate Pressure Zero screen appears.

to select Zero.

5. Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize, then press

to save the zero pressure value.

6. Disconnect the pump from the pressure transducer.

7. Press to return to the Pressure Sensor Cal menu.


8. At the Pressure Sensor Cal menu, press

The Calibrate Pressure Span screen appears.

Servicing

Temperature Control Board Replacement

to select Span.

9. Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize, use

and to enter the known barometric pressure, and press to save the pressure value.

10. Reconnect the instrument tubing to the pressure transducer.

11. Install the cover.

Temperature Control

Board Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the temperature control board inside the analyzer ( Figure 7–8 ).

Equipment Required:

Temperature control board




2. Disconnect all connectors from the temperature control board. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the

CONV TC cable. Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the yellow wire is towards the front.

3. Snap off the board from the board mounts.

4. To install the temperature control board, follow previous steps in reverse.

Thermistor

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the ambient temperature thermistor

( Figure 7–20 ).

Equipment Required:

Thermistor


Servicing

Ambient Temperature Calibration

Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity. A properly ground antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component. ▲


2. Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor from the AMB

TEMP connector on the measurement interface board.

3. Snap the new thermistor into the AMB TEMP connector.

Thermistor

Figure 7–20. Replacing the Thermistor

Ambient Temperature

Calibration

Use the following procedure to calibrate the ambient internal temperature for the instrument.

Equipment Required:

Calibrated thermometer or 10K ±1% Resistor



▲


Servicing

Fuse Replacement



2. Tape the thermistor (plugged into the measurement interface board) to a calibrated thermometer (Figure 7-2).

Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of ±0.2 °C, and have a value of 10K ohms at 25 °C, an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10K resistor to the thermistor input (AMB

TEMP) on the measurement interface board, and enter the temperature reading. ▲

A 1 °C change corresponds to a ±5% change in resistance, thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check; however, it clearly is not NIST traceable. ▲


to scroll to Temperature Calibration > and press .

The Calibrate Ambient Temperature screen appears.

>



▲

4. Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize, use

and to enter the known temperature, and press to save the temperature value.


Fuse Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the fuse.

Equipment Required:

Replacement fuses (refer to the “ Replacement Parts List ” in this chapter).

1. Turn instrument OFF and unplug the power cord.


Servicing

Ammonia Scrubber Replacement

2. Remove fuse drawer, located on the AC power connector.

3. If either fuse is blown, replace both fuses.

4. Insert fuse drawer and reconnect power cord.

Ammonia Scrubber

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the ammonia scrubbers inside the converter ( Figure 7–21 ).

Equipment Required:

Ammonia scrubber



Note After replacing the optional I/O expansion board, calibrate the current outputs and the analog voltage inputs. See the “ Analog Output

Calibration ” procedure and the “ Analog Input Calibration ” procedure in this chapter. ▲

1. Turn converter module OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.

2. Unscrew the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber.

3. Pull the scrubber off the mounting clips.

4. Push the replacement scrubber into the mounting clips.

5. Attach the Teflon tubing at both ends of the scrubber.

6. Replace the cover.


Servicing

I/O Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement

Mounting Clips

Ammonia Scrubber

Figure 7–21. Replacing the Ammonia Scrubbers

I/O Expansion Board

(Optional)

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the optional I/O expansion board

( Figure 7–22 ).

Equipment Required:

I/O expansion board




2. Unplug the I/O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard.

3. Remove the two standoffs holding the I/O expansion board connector to the rear panel ( Figure 7–23 ).

4. Pop off the board from the mounting studs and remove the board.

5. To install the I/O expansion board, follow previous steps in reverse.


Servicing

Digital Output Board Replacement

6. Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter.

Motherboard Support Bracket

Mounting Studs

Motherboard

Digital Output Board

I/O Expansion Board (Opt)

Figure 7–22. Replacing the I/O Expansion Board (Optional)

Motherboard

I/O Expansion Board


Figure 7–23. Rear Panel Board Connectors

Digital Output Board

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board ( Figure 7–

22 ).

Equipment Required:

Digital output board


Servicing

Motherboard Replacement



▲


2. Remove the I/O expansion board (optional), if used. See the “ I/O

Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement ” procedure in this chapter.

3. Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard.

4. Using the nut driver, remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel ( Figure 7–23 ).

5. Pop off the digital output board from the mounting studs and remove the board.

6. To install the digital output board, follow previous steps in reverse.

Motherboard

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard ( Figure 7–22 ).

Equipment Required:

Motherboard

Philips screwdriver




2. Remove the I/O expansion board (optional), if used. See the “ I/O

Expansion Board (Optional) Replacement ” procedure in this chapter.


Servicing

Measurement Interface Board Replacement

3. Remove the digital output board. See the “ Digital Output Board

Replacement ” procedure in this chapter.

4. Unplug all connectors from the motherboard. Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection.

5. Using the nut driver, remove the eight standoffs securing the board to the rear panel ( Figure 7–23 ).

6. Pop off the motherboard from motherboard support bracket, and remove the motherboard.

7. To install the motherboard, follow previous steps in reverse.

8. Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter

(all ranges).

Measurement

Interface Board

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board

( Figure 7–24 ).

Equipment Required:

Measurement interface board

Philips screwdriver


▲

1. Lower the partition panel, then proceed to the next step below. Refer to

“ Removing the Measurement Bench and Lowering the Partition Panel ” in this chapter.

2. Unplug all connectors. Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate reconnection.

3. Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board.

Pop off the measurement interface board from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board ( Figure 7–24 ).


Servicing

Flow Transducer Replacement

4. To install the measurement interface board, follow previous steps in reverse.

5. Re-install the measurement bench.

6. Calibrate the PMT voltage, pressure transducer, flow transducer, input board, and ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this chapter.

Mounting Studs (2)

Mounting Screws (2)

Measurement Interface Board

Figure 7–24. Replacing the Measurement Interface Board

Flow Transducer

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the flow transducer ( Figure 7–25 ).

Equipment Required:

Flow transducer

Philips screwdriver



2. Disconnect the plumbing connections from the flow transducer. Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection.


Servicing

Flow Transducer Calibration

Flow Transducer

Retaining Nuts

Figure 7–25. Replacing the Flow Transducer

3. Disconnect the flow transducer cable from the measurement interface board.

4. Loosen the two retaining nuts securing the flow transducer to the ozonator bracket and remove the flow transducer.

5. To install the flow transducer, follow previous steps in reverse.

6. Calibrate the flow transducer. Refer to the “ Flow Transducer

Calibration ” procedure that follows.

Flow Transducer

Calibration

Use the following procedure to calibrate the flow transducer.

Equipment Required:

Calibrated flow sensor



▲



Servicing

Flow Transducer Calibration



2. Disconnect the pump cable from AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board.


to scroll to Flow Calibration > and press .

The Flow Sensor Cal menu appears.



▲

4. At the Flow Sensor Cal menu, press

The Calibrate Flow Zero screen appears.

to select Zero.

>

5. Wait at least 10 seconds for the zero reading to stabilize, then press

to save the zero flow value.

6. Reconnect the pump cable to the AC PUMP connector on the measurement interface board.

7. Connect a calibrated flow sensor at the SAMPLE bulkhead on the rear panel.

8. Press to return to the Flow Sensor Cal menu.

9. At the Flow Sensor Cal menu, press

The Calibrate Flow Span screen appears.

to select Span.

10. Wait at least 10 seconds for the reading to stabilize, use and to enter the flow sensor reading, and press save the value.


to


Servicing

Converter Temperature Control Board Replacement

Converter


Board Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the converter temperature control board (Figure 7-3).

Equipment Required:

Converter temperature control board



1. Turn instrument and converter module OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover from the converter.

2. Disconnect all connectors from the converter temperature control board. Use a small flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the two screws securing the CONV TC cable. Note that the red wire is towards the rear and the yellow wire is towards the front.

3. Snap off the board from the board mounts.

4. To install the converter temperature control board, follow previous steps in reverse.

Converter

Interface Board

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the converter interface board

(Figure 7-26).

Equipment Required:

Converter interface board

Philips screwdriver



1. Turn instrument and converter module OFF, unplug the power cord, and remove the cover.


Servicing

Converter Interface Board Replacement

2. Unplug all connectors from the converter interface board. Note connector locations to facilitate reconnection.

3. Using the nut driver, unscrew the two standoffs holding the converter interface board connector to the rear panel ( Figure 7–27 ).

4. Pop off the converter interface board from support bracket, and remove the converter interface board.

5. To install the converter interface board, follow previous steps in reverse.

Support Bracket

Converter Interface

Board

Figure 7–26. Replacing the Converter Interface Board


Connector

Figure 7–27. Rear Panel Converter Interface Board Connector


Servicing

Front Panel Board Replacement

Front Panel Board

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board ( Figure 7–

28 ).

Equipment Required:

Front panel board



2. Remove the three ribbon cables and the two-wire connector from the front panel board.

3. Pop off the board from the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support.

4. Replace the front panel board by following previous steps in reverse.

LCD Module

LCD Module Screws (2)

Retaining Screw

Front Panel Board

Mounting Studs (2)

Ribbon Cables (3)

Two-Wire Connector


Bottom Support

Figure 7–28. Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module


Servicing

LCD Module Replacement

LCD Module

Replacement

Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module ( Figure 7–28 ).

Equipment Required:

LCD module

Philips screwdriver

CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks, do not to let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes. If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes, wash it off immediately using soap and water. ▲


Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module. ▲

The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile, handle it carefully. ▲

Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth, it may easily scratch the plate. ▲

Do not use alcohol, acetone, MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module, use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent. ▲

Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases. ▲

Do not shake or jolt the LCD module. ▲


2. Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two-wire connector from the front panel board.

3. Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module.

4. Slide the LCD module out towards the right of the instrument.


Servicing

Service Locations

5. Replace the LCD module by following previous steps in reverse.

Service Locations

For additional assistance, service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide. Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www.thermo.com/aqi.

1-866-282-0430 Toll Free




Chapter 8

System Description

This chapter describes the function and location of the system components, provides an overview of the software structure, and includes a description of the system electronics and input/output connections and functions as follows:

●

●

“ Hardware ” on page 8-1

“ Software ” on page 8-5

●

●

“ Electronics ” on page 8-7

“ I/O Components ” on page 8-11

Hardware

Model 17i hardware components (Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2) include:

●

NO

2

-to NO converter

●

Mode solenoid

●

●

NH

3

converter

Reaction chamber

●

●

Optical filter

Pressure transducer

●

●

●

●

●

●

Sample flow sensor

Ozonator

●

Ozone flow switch

Photomultiplier tube

Photomultiplier tube cooler

External Pump

●

Dry air capillary

Ammonia scrubber



Hardware

Pressure Transducer

Input Board

HVPS

Thermistor

Measurement

Interface Board

Power Supply

Converter

Flow

Transducer

Flow

Switch

Reaction

Chamber

Ozonator Ozonator Motherboard Digital Output Board

Transfomer Solenoids (4)

PMT Assembly

Figure 8–1. Analyzer Module Hardware Components

Temperature

Control Board

Capillary

Fan

I/O Expansion

Board (Opt)


Heated Capillarly

Holders (3)


NO2-to-NO Converter

NH

3

Converter

Converter Temperature

Control Board

Transformer

Ammonia Scrubbers (3)

Figure 8–2. Converter Module Hardware Components

Fan

Converter

Interface Board

NO

2

-to-NO Converter

The NO

2

-to-NO converter heats molybdenum to approximately 325 °C in order to convert and detect NO

2

. The converter consists of an insulated housing, heater, replaceable cartridge, and a type K thermocouple sensor.

Mode Solenoid

The mode solenoid valve switches analyzer operation between the NO mode and NO x

mode. It routes the ambient air sample either through the reaction chamber (NO mode) or through the NO

2

-to-NO converter and then to the reaction chamber (NO x

mode).

NH

3

Converter

The NH

3

converter heats stainless steel to approximately 750 °C in order to convert and detect NH

3

. The converter consists of an insulated housing, ceramic heater, replaceable cartridge, and a type K thermocouple sensor.



Reaction Chamber


The reaction chamber is where the sample reacts with ozone and produces excited NO

2

that gives off a photon of energy when it decays.

The reaction chamber is heated and controlled to approximately 50 °C in order to ensure the greatest instrument stability. The sample and ozone flow capillaries and a thermistor sensor are also housed in/on the reaction chamber assembly.

Optical Filter

The optical filter housed in the reaction chamber limits the spectral region viewed by the detector and eliminates possible interferences due to other chemiluminescent reactions.


The pressure transducer measures the reaction chamber pressure.

Sample Flow Sensor

The sample flow sensor located at the reaction chamber inlet measures the sample flow into the reaction chamber.

Ozonator

The Ozonator generates the necessary ozone concentration required for the chemiluminescent reaction. The ozone reacts with the NO in the ambient air sample to produce the electronically excited NO

2

molecules.

Ozonator Flow

Switch

The ozonator flow switch located at the ozonator inlet completes an electrical safety circuit when air flows through the sensor to the ozonator. If airflow stops, the flow sensor breaks the electrical circuit to the ozonator and shuts it off to prevent the ozonator from overheating.


The Photomultiplier tube (PMT) provides the infrared sensitivity required to detect the NO

2

luminescence resulting from the reaction of the ozone with the ambient air sample.

Optical energy from the reaction is converted to an electrical signal by the

PMT and sent to the input board that transmits it to the processor.


Cooler

The thermoelectric PMT cooler reduces the PMT temperature to approximately -3 °C to minimize dark current and increase instrument sensitivity. The cooler helps to increase zero and span stability over a wide ambient temperature range. The cooler housing also shields the PMT from external electrical and optical interferences.



External Pump

External Pump

The external pump draws the reacted gasses out of the reaction chamber.

Dry Air Capillary

The dry air capillary along with the pump is used to control flow in the dry air line.

Ammonia Scrubber

The ammonia scrubbers are mounted internally and remove ammonia from the sample air.

Software

The processor software tasks are organized into four areas:

●

Instrument Control

●

●

●

Monitoring Signals

Measurement Calculations

Output Communication

Instrument Control

Low-level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards, such as analog and digital I/O and heater control. These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high-level processor that also controls the front-panel user interface. The low-level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high-level firmware and loaded on power-up if a different version is detected.

Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board. This address is also used for the communications between the low-level processors and the high-level processor.

Every tenth of a second the frequency counters, analog I/O, and digital I/O are read and written to by the low-level processor. The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second. The high-level processor polls the low-level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data.

Monitoring Signals

Signals are gathered from the low-level processors once per second, and then processed by the high-level processor to produce the final measurement values. The one-second accumulated counts representing the

NO/NO x

/N t

concentrations are accumulated and reported for the userspecified averaging time. If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds,



Software the measurement is reported every 10 seconds. The one-second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly (no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high-level processor).

In auto mode, every ten seconds the NO/NO x

/N t

solenoid switches and the processor waits three seconds for the reaction chamber to flush and stabilize. After those three seconds, it accumulates the signal counts for seven seconds before again switching the solenoid.

Measurement

Calculations

The calculations of the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentrations are lengthy and use the high-level processor to provide the most accurate readings. The calculations begin by subtracting the appropriate electronic offset from the seven-second count accumulation. Following this correction, the raw accumulated counts are scaled according to the gain setting of the input board.

Next, the uncorrected NO, NO x

, and N t

values are determined according to a unique averaging algorithm which minimizes errors resulting from rapidly changing gas concentrations. This algorithm results in NO, NO x

, and N t

values which are stored in RAM in a circular buffer that holds all the ten second data from the previous five minutes. This data is averaged over the selected time interval, which can be any multiple of ten between

10 and 300 (the manual modes have additional intervals of 1, 2, and 5 seconds).

The background values for NO, NO x

, and N t

, which are corrected for temperature, are subtracted from their respective averages. The NO reading is corrected by the stored span factor and by the temperature factor. The

NO x

reading is partially corrected by the span factor, temperature factor, and balance factor. The N t

reading is partially corrected by the span factor, temperature factor, and balance factor.

The corrected NO value is subtracted from the partially corrected NO x value to yield an uncorrected NO

2

value. The NO

2

value is then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NO

2

reading. The corrected

NO

2

reading is added to the corrected NO reading to yield a fully corrected

NO x

value. The corrected NO x

value is subtracted from the partially corrected N t

value to yield an uncorrected NH

3

value. The NH

3

value is then corrected for converter efficiency to give a corrected NH

3

reading.

Finally, the corrected NH

3

reading is added to the corrected NO x

reading to yield a fully corrected N t

value.

Output Communication

The front panel display, serial and Ethernet data ports, and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations. The front panel display presents the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t



Electronics concentrations simultaneously. The display is updated every 1-10 seconds, depending on the averaging time.

The analog output ranges are user selectable via software. The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range. The defaults are calculated by dividing the data values by the full-scale range for each of the three parameters and then multiplying each result by the user-selected output range. Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within -5% of full-scale. The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value.

Electronics

All electronics operate from a universal switching supply, which is capable of auto-sensing the input voltage and working over the entire operating range.

Internal pumps and heaters all operate on 110VAC. An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210-250VAC or 90-110VAC ranges.

An on/off switch controls all power to the analyzer, and is accessible on the front panel. The on/off switch on the converter only controls the AC power to the heaters, the converter electronics are powered through the umbilical cable connected to the analyzer.

Motherboard

The motherboard contains the main processor, power supplies, a subprocessor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument. The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel mounted function key panel and/or over I/O connections on the rear panel and sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information. The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the frontpanel mounted graphics display and to the rear-panel I/O. The motherboard also contains I/O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data. Connectors located on the motherboard include:

External Connectors

External connectors include:

●

●

●

External Accessory (to external converter)

RS-232/485 Communications (two connectors)

Ethernet Communications



Electronics

●

I/O connector with Power Fail Relay, 16 Digital Inputs, and 6 Analog

Voltage Outputs.

Internal Connectors

Internal connectors include:

●

Function key panel and Display

●

●

Measurement Interface Board Data

I/O Expansion Board Data

●

●


AC distribution

Measurement

Interface Board

The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument. It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system. It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard.

Measurement Interface

Board Connectors

Connectors located on the measurement interface board include:

●

●

Data communication with the motherboard

24V and 120VAC power supply inputs

●

●

●

●

Fans and solenoid outputs

Cooler control

120VAC outputs for the pump and temperature control board

Ozonator

●

●

●

●

●

Flow and pressure sensors

Ambient temperature sensor


PMT high voltage supply

Measurement input board

Converter Interface

Board

The converter interface board serves as a central connection area for all electronics in the converter. It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the external NH

3

converter assembly. It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard via the 15-pin connector on the rear panel.



Electronics

Converter Interface Board

Connectors

Connectors located on the converter interface board include:

●

Data communication and 24V power supply input with the motherboard

●

●

●

●

Fan and solenoid outputs


Flow and pressure sensors (not used)

Ambient temperature sensor (not used)

Flow Sensor

Assembly

The flow sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a flow transducer with input and output gas fittings. The flow transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across a precision orifice. This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system.

Pressure Sensor

Assembly

The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing an instrumentation amplifier and a pressure transducer with a gas input fitting. The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure.


Board

The temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the reaction chamber and converter.

The reaction chamber temperature is measured with a thermistor. The voltage across the thermistor is fed to the main processor for use in calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature. The voltage across the thermistor is also compared to a set-point voltage and used to control that the reaction chamber heaters to maintain a constant temperature of 50 °C. Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermistor.

The converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple signal and fed back to the main processor to be used to display and control the converter temperature. The temperature control board receives control signals from the main processor software to control the converter heater to the desired set point. Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults.



Electronics

Converter Temperature

Control Board

The converter temperature control board regulates and sets the temperature of the capillary block and NH

3

converter.

The temperature is measured with a thermistor. The voltage across the thermistor is fed to the converter processor for use in calculating and displaying the reaction chamber temperature. The voltage across the thermistor is also compared to a set-point voltage and used to control that the capillary block heaters to maintain a constant temperature of 50 °C.

Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermistor.

The NH

3

converter temperature is measured by a conditioned thermocouple signal and fed back to the converter processor to be used to display and control the NH

3

converter temperature. The temperature control board receives control signals from the converter processor software to control the converter heater to the desired set point. Protective circuitry prevents over heating in the event of broken wires to the thermocouple or processor faults.

PMT Power Supply

Assembly

The PMT power supply produces high voltage to operate the photomultiplier tube used in the measurement system. The output voltage is adjustable from approximately 600 to 1200 volts under software control.

Input Board

Assembly

The input board accepts the current signal from the PMT and converts it to a voltage, which is scaled by a factor of approximately 1, 10, or 100 depending on the full-scale range of the NO channel. The scaled voltage signal is converted to a frequency and sent to the microprocessor.

The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under software control. The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in parallel with the PMT input. This allows the input board and the connection to the processor system to be tested and calibrated without using the PMT.

Digital Output Board

The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument.

Ten relay contacts normally open (with power off) are provided which are electrically isolated from each other.



I/O Components


(Optional)

The I/O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage inputs and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument. It contains local power supplies, a DC/DC isolator supply, a sub-processor and analog circuits. Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of 0V to 10VDC. Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA.

Front Panel Connector

Board

The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the front panel mounted function key panel and Graphics display. It serves as central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel, the graphics display control lines, and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard. This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight.

I/O Components

External I/O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices:

●

Analog output (voltage and current)

●

●

●

Analog input (voltage)

Digital output (TTL levels)

Digital input (TTL levels)

Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I/O support for future expansion. ▲

Analog Voltage

Outputs

The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs. Each may be software configured for any one of the following ranges, while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits:

●

●

0-100mV

0-1V

●

●

0-5V

0-10V

The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware. At least 5% of full-scale over and under range are also supported, but may be overridden in software.



I/O Components

The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user-defined range in the units of the selected parameter.

The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs.

Analog Current

Outputs (Optional)

The optional I/O Expansion board includes six isolated current outputs.

These are software configured for any one of the following ranges, while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits:

●

0-20 mA

●

4-20 mA

The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through firmware. At least 5% of full-scale over and under range are also supported, but may be overridden in software.

The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user-defined range in the units of the selected parameter.

The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs. The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground, but they share a common return line (Isolated GND).

Analog Voltage

Inputs (Optional)

The optional I/O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs.

These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third-party devices such as meteorological equipment. The user may assign a label, unit, and a voltage to user-defined unit conversion table (up to 16 points). All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts.

Digital Relay

Outputs

The instrument includes one power fail relay on motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board. These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA @ 200VDC.

The power fail relay is Form C (both normally opened and normally closed contacts). All other relays are Form A (normally opened contacts) and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer, as well as remote control to other devices, such as for controlling valves during calibration. The user may select what information is sent out each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed.

Digital Inputs

Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including:

●

●

NO Measure Mode

NO x

Measure Mode



I/O Components

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

N t

Measure Mode

Zero Gas Mode

Span Gas Mode

Set Background

Cal to low span

Cal to high span

Analog outputs to zero

Analog outputs to full-scale

The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration.

The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer. The active state can be user defined in firmware.

Serial Ports

Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port.

The standard bi-directional serial interface can be configured for either RS-

232 or RS-485. The serial baud rate is user selectable in firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud. The user can also set the data bits, parity, and stop bits. The following protocols are supported:

●

C-Link

●

●

Modbus Slave

Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen)

●

Streaming Data

The Streaming Data protocol transmits user-selected measurement data via the serial port in real-time for capture by a serial printer, data logger, or PC.

RS-232 Connection

A null modem (crossed) cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM Compatible PC. However, a straight cable (one to one) may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices. As a general rule, when the connector of the host remote device is female, a straight cable is required and when the connector is male, a null modem cable is required.

Data Format:

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 BAUD

7 or 8 data bits



I/O Components

1 or 2 stop bit

No, odd, or even parity

All responses are terminated with a carriage return (hex 0D)

Refer to Table 8–1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration.

Table 8–1. RS-232 DB Connector Pin Configurations

DB9 Pin Function

2 RX

3 TX

7 RTS

8 CTS

5 Ground

RS-485 Connection

The instrument uses a four wire RS-485 configuration with automatic flow control (SD). Refer to Table 8–2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration.

Table 8–2. RS-485 DB Connector Pin Configuration

DB9 Pin Function

5 ground

Ethernet Connection

An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting

TCP/IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing. The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing (set using a

DHCP server).

Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port.

External Accessory

Connector

The external accessory connector is used to connect to the external converter in the Model 17i analyzer.


Chapter 9

Optional Equipment

The Model 17i is available with the following options:

●

●

“ Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves ” on page 9-1

“ Ozonator Permeation Dryer ” on page 9-2

●

●

●

●

“ Teflon Particulate Filter ” on page 9-2

“ Ozone Particulate Filter ” on page 9-2

“ I/O Expansion Board Assembly ” on page 9-2

“ 25-Pin Terminal Board Assembly ” on page 9-2

●

●

●

“ Terminal Block and Cable Kits ” on page 9-3

“ Cables ” on page 9-3

“ Mounting Options ” on page 9-5

Internal Zero/Span and Sample Valves

With the zero/span assembly option, a source of span gas is connected to the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port as shown in Figure 9–1 . Zero and span gas should be supplied at atmospheric pressure. It may be necessary to use an atmospheric dump bypass plumbing arrangement to accomplish this.

For more information, refer to the “ Installation ” chapter and the

“ Operation ” chapter.



Ozonator Permeation Dryer

Figure 9–1. Flow Diagram, Zero/Span Option

Ozonator Permeation

Dryer

The permeation dryer minimizes routing maintenance procedures by providing a continuous stream of dry air to the ozonator (using the selective water permeation characteristics of the dryer). With the permeation dryer option, it is not necessary to constantly replenish the ozonator air-drying column as in the standard instrument.

Teflon Particulate

Filter

A 5-10 micron pore size, two-inch diameter Teflon® element is available for the Model 17i. This filter should be installed just prior to the

SAMPLE bulkhead. When using a filter, all calibrations and span checks must be performed through the filter.

Ozone Particulate

Filter

The ozone particulate filter minimizes the potential for contamination of the ozonator by trapping any particulate matter before passing through the ozonator.


Assembly

The I/O expansion board provides six analog current output channels (0-

20 mA or 4-20 mA) and eight analog voltage inputs (0-10V). The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs.

25-Pin Terminal

Board Assembly

The 25-pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I/O expansion board. Refer to “ Terminal Board PCB Assemblies ” in the

“ Installation ” chapter for information on attaching the cable to the connector board. For associated part numbers, refer to the “ Servicing ” chapter.



Terminal Block and Cable Kits

Terminal Block and

Cable Kits

The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument. These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals.

Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available. One kit is for the

DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector. The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I/O expansion board. For associated part numbers, refer to “ External Device Connection Components ” on page 7-7 .

Each kit consists of:

● one six-foot cable

●

● one terminal block one snap track

Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I/O expansion board requires:

●

● two DB37 kits one DB25 kit

Cables

Table 9–1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9–2 provides the cable color codes. For associated part numbers, refer to “ External Device Connection Components ” on page

7-7 .

Note

Table 9–2 provides the color coding for both 25-pin cables and 37pin cables. Color codes for pins 1-25 are for 25-pin cables; color codes for pins 1-37 are for 37-pin cables. ▲

Table 9–1. Cable Options

Description

DB37M to open end

DB37F to open end

DB25M to open end

Cable Length

Six feet

Six feet

Six feet

RS-232



Cables

Table 9–2. Color Codes for 25-Pin and 37-Pin Cables

Pin Color

1 BLACK

Pin Color

20 RED/BLACK

2 BROWN 21 ORANGE/BLACK

3 RED 22 YELLOW/BLACK

4 ORANGE 23 GREEN/BLACK

5 YELLOW 24 GRAY/BLACK

6 GREEN

7 BLUE

25 PINK/BLACK

End color codes for 25-pin cables continue for 37-pin cables.

8 VIOLET

9 GRAY

19 WHITE

11 PINK

26

27

28

29

13 BLACK/WHITE 31

15 RED/WHITE 33

PINK/GREEN

PIND/RED

PINK/VIOLET

LIGHT BLUE

LIGHT BLUE/BROWN

LIGHT BLUE/RED

LIGHT BLUE/VIOLET

LIGHT BLUE/BLACK

17 GREEN/WHITE 35

18 BLUE/WHITE 36

19 VIOLET/WHITE 37

GRAY/GREEN

GRAY/RED

GRAY/VIOLET

LIGHT GREEN/BLACK



Mounting Options

Mounting Options

The instrument can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9–

3 and shown in Figure 9–2 through Figure 9–5 . This applies to both the analyzer module and the converter module.

Table 9–3. Mounting Options

Mounting Type

Bench

EIA rack

Retrofit rack

Description

Positioned on bench, includes mounting feet, and front panel side-trim handles.

Mounted in an EIA-style rack, includes mounting slides, and front panel EIA-rack mounting handles.

Mounted in a Thermo non-EIA rack, includes mounting slides, and retrofit front panel rack-mounting handles.


Figure 9–2. Rack Mount Option Assembly



Mounting Options


Figure 9–3. Bench Mounting



Mounting Options


Figure 9–4. EIA Rack Mounting



Mounting Options


Figure 9–5. Retrofit Rack Mounting



Appendix A

Warranty

Warranty

Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller's published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship, when subjected to normal, proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel, for the period of time set forth in the product documentation, published specifications or package inserts. If a period of time is not specified in Seller’s product documentation, published specifications or package inserts, the warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety (90) days for all other products (the "Warranty

Period"). Seller agrees during the Warranty Period, to repair or replace, at

Seller's option, defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications; provided that

(a) Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect, which notice shall include the product model and serial number (if applicable) and details of the warranty claim; (b) after Seller’s review, Seller will provide Buyer with service data and/or a Return Material

Authorization (“RMA”), which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product-specific handling instructions; and (c) then, if applicable, Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer. Replacement parts may be new or refurbished, at the election of Seller. All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller.

Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller’s Terms and

Conditions of Sale. Consumables, including but not limited to lamps, fuses, batteries, bulbs and other such expendable items, are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller, but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier, to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier.

In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs, replacements or corrections required, in whole or in part, as the result of (i) normal wear and tear, (ii) accident, disaster or event of force majeure, (iii) misuse, fault or negligence of or by Buyer, (iv) use of the Products in a manner for which

Model 17i Instruction Manual A-1

Warranty

Warranty they were not designed, (v) causes external to the Products such as, but not limited to, power failure or electrical power surges, (vi) improper storage and handling of the Products or (vii) use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller. If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder, Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller's then prevailing time and materials rates. If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty, Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller's then prevailing time and materials rates. ANY INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, REPAIR,

SERVICE, RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF, OR

OTHER TAMPERING WITH, THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY

ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT

SELLER'S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL, OR ANY USE OF

REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER, SHALL

IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH

RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS.

THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY

STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT

SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A

DEFECTIVE PRODUCT. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN

THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL

OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ORAL

OR WRITTEN, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS,

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY

PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT

THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR-FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH

ANY PARTICULAR RESULT.

A-2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

Appendix B

C-Link Protocol Commands

This appendix provides a description of the C-Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 17i analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger. C-Link protocol may be used over RS-

232, RS-485, or Ethernet. C-Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP/IP port 9880.

Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a userdefined periodic basis. Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881.

For details, see the following topics:

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

“ Instrument Identification Number ” on page B-1

“ Commands ” on page B-2

“ Measurements ” on page B-11

“ Alarms ” on page B-15

“ Diagnostics ” on page B-20

“ Datalogging ” on page B-20

“ Calibration ” on page B-28

“ Keys/Display ” on page B-31

“ Measurement Configuration ” on page B-33

“ Hardware Configuration ” on page B-37

“ Communications Configuration ” on page B-41

“ I/O Configuration ” on page B-46

“ Record Layout Definition ” on page B-51

Instrument

Identification

Number

Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) symbol or byte value equivalent of the instrument’s identification number plus 128.

For example, if the instrument ID is set to 25, then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 153 decimal. The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number. If

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual B-1


Commands the instrument ID is set to 0, then this byte is not required. For more information on changing Instrument ID, see Chapter 3, “ Operation ”.

Commands

The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters via remote. However, the command “set mode remote” can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode. Report commands

(commands that don’t begin with “set”) can be issued either in the remote or local mode. For information on changing modes, see Chapter 3,

“ Operation ”.

The commands can be sent in either uppercase or lowercase characters.

Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number (ASCII) character. The command in the example below begins with the ASCII character code 170 decimal, which directs the command to the Model 17i, and is terminated by a carriage return “CR” (ASCII character code 13 decimal).

<ASCII 170> T I M E <CR>

If an incorrect command is sent, a “bad command” message will be received. The example below sends the incorrect command “set unit ppm” instead of the correct command “set gas unit ppm.”

Send:

Receive: set unit ppm bad cmd

The “save” and “set save params” commands stores parameters in FLASH.

It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed, that this command be sent. If changes are not saved, they will be lost in the event of a power failure.

Commands List

Table B–1 lists the 17i C-Link protocol commands. The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below.

Table B–1. C-Link Protocol Commands

Command

addr dns addr gw addr ip addr nm

Description Page

Reports/sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B-41

Reports/sets default gateway address for Ethernet port

Reports/sets IP address for Ethernet port

Reports/sets netmask address for Ethernet port

B-41

B-41

B-41

B-2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific



Commands

Command

alarm capillary temp max

Description

Reports/sets capillary temperature alarm maximum value

Page

B-15 alarm capillary temp min alarm chamber temp max alarm chamber temp min

Reports/sets capillary temperature alarm minimum value

Reports/sets chamber temperature alarm maximum value

Reports/sets chamber temperature alarm minimum value

B-15

B-16

B-16 alarm conc nh3 max Reports/sets current NH

3

concentration alarm maximum value

B-16 alarm conc nh3 min Reports/sets current NH

3

concentration alarm minimum value B-16 alarm conc no max Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm maximum value B-16 alarm conc no min Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm minimum value B-16 alarm conc no2 max Reports/sets current NO

2


B-16 alarm conc no2 min Reports/sets current NO

2

concentration alarm minimum value B-16 alarm conc nox max Reports/sets current NO x


B-16 alarm conc nox min Reports/sets current NO x

concentration alarm minimum value B-16 alarm conc nt max Reports/sets current N t

concentration alarm maximum value B-16 alarm conc nt min Reports/sets current N t

concentration alarm minimum value B-16 alarm converter temp max

Reports/sets NO value

2

converter temperature alarm maximum B-17 alarm converter temp min

Reports/sets NO

2

converter temperature alarm minimum value

B-17

Reports/sets PMT cooler temperature alarm maximum value B-17 alarm cooler temp max alarm cooler temp min

Reports/sets PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value B-17

B-17 alarm ext conv temp max alarm ext conv temp min

Reports/sets NH

3

external converter temperature alarm maximum value

Reports/sets NH

3

external converter temperature alarm minimum value

Reports/sets internal temperature alarm maximum value alarm internal temp max alarm internal temp min

Reports/sets internal temperature alarm minimum value alarm pressure max Reports/sets pressure alarm maximum value alarm pressure min Reports/sets pressure alarm minimum value

B-17

B-18

B-18

B-18

B-18

Model 17i Instruction Manual B-3


Commands

B-4 Model 17i Instruction Manual

Command

alarm sample flow max

Description

Reports/sets sample flow alarm maximum value

Page

B-19 alarm sample flow min

Reports/sets sample flow alarm minimum value B-19 alarm trig conc nh3 Reports/sets current NH

3

concentration alarm warning value B-19 alarm trig conc no Reports/sets current NO concentration alarm warning value B-19 alarm trig conc no2 Reports/sets current NO

2

concentration alarm warning value B-19 alarm trig conc nox Reports/sets current NO x

concentration alarm warning value B-19 alarm trig conc nt allow mode cmd

Reports/sets current N t

concentration alarm warning value

Reports/sets the current allow mode setting which configures the instrument to either accept or ignore the “set mode local” and “set mode remote” commands. analog iout range Reports analog current output range per channel analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel

B-19

B-44 analog vout range avg time

Reports analog voltage output range per channel

Reports/sets averaging time

B-46

B-47

B-47

B-11 baud bkg no bkg nox bkg nt cal bkg no cal bkg nox cal bkg nt cal coef 1 no2 cal coef 2 no2 cal coef nh3

Reports/sets current baud rate

Reports/sets current NO background

Reports/sets current NO x

background


background

Sets/auto-calibrates NO background

Sets/auto-calibrates NO x

background

Sets/auto-calibrates N t

background

Sets/auto-calibrates NO

2

coefficient


2

coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates NH

3

coefficient

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-42

B-31

B-31

B-31 cal coef no cal coef nox cal coef nt cal gas nh3 cal gas no cal gas no2 cal gas nox cal gas nt cal high nh3 coef

Sets/auto-calibrates NO coefficient


coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates N t

coefficient

Reports/sets NH

3

span gas concentration

Reports/sets NO span gas concentration

Reports/sets NO

2


Reports/sets NO x


Reports/sets N t


Sets/auto-calibrates high range NH

3

coefficient

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-30

B-30

B-30

B-30

B-30

B-28




Commands cal no coef cal no2 coef cal nox bkg cal nox coef capillary temp clr lrecs clr records clr srecs coef 1 no2 coef 2 no2 coef nh3 coef no

Command

cal high no coef cal high no2 coef cal high nox coef cal high nt coef cal low nh3 coef cal low no coef cal low no2 coef cal low nox coef cal low nt coef cal no bkg

Description

Sets/auto-calibrates high range NO coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates high range NO

2

coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates high range NO x

coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates high range N

Sets/auto-calibrates low range NH

Sets/auto-calibrates low range NO

Sets/auto-calibrates low range N


Reports/sets current NO

Reports/sets current NH x

2

3 t t

coefficient

3 x

coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates low range NO coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates low range NO

2

coefficient

coefficient

coefficient

Sets/auto-calibrates NO background

Sets/auto-calibrates NO coefficient


2

coefficient

background


coefficient

Reports current capillary chamber temperature

Clears away only long records that have been saved

Clears away all logging records that have been saved

Clears away only short records that have been saved


2

coefficient

coefficient

coefficient

Reports/sets current NO coefficient coef no2 coef nt contrast conv set temp conv temp cooler temp


2

coefficient


coefficient

Reports/sets current screen contrast

Reports/sets temperature setpoint for NO

2

converter

Reports current NO

2

converter temperature

Reports temperature of PMT cooler (same as PMT temperature) copy lrec to sp copy sp to lrec

Sets/copies current lrec selection into the scratch pad

Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into lrec list

B-26

B-26 copy sp to srec Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B-26 copy sp to stream Sets/copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B-26 copy srec to sp Sets/copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B-26

B-29

B-29

B-37

B-38

B-13

B-13

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-13

B-20

B-20

B-20

B-29

B-29

B-29

B-29

Page

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28

B-28



Commands


Command Description

copy stream to sp Sets/copies current streaming data selection into the scratch pad

Page

B-26 custom Reports/sets defined custom range concentration data treatment lrec Reports/sets data treatment for concentrations values in long records

B-34

B-21 data treatment srec Reports/sets data treatment for concentrations values in short records date default params

Reports/sets current date

Sets parameters to default values

B-21 dhcp diag volt iob diag volt mb diag volt mib

Reports/sets state of use of DHCP

Reports diagnostic voltage level for I/O expansion board

Reports diagnostic voltage level for motherboard

Reports diagnostic voltage level for measurement interface board

B-38

B-39

B-42

B-20

B-20

B-20 dig in din do (down) dout dtoa en (enter) er erec erec format erec layout flags flow format gas gas mode gas unit (gu) he (help) high avg time

Reports status of the digital inputs

Reports/sets digital input channel and active state

B-48

B-48

Simulates pressing down pushbutton

Reports/sets digital output channel and active state

Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per channel

Simulates pressing enter pushbutton

B-31

B-48

B-48

Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in the format specified in the commands

Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions in the format specified in the command

Reports/sets erec format (ASCII or binary)

Reports current layout of erec data

B-31

B-22

B-22

B-24

B-24

Reports 8 hexadecimal digits (or flags) that represent the status of the ozonator, PMT, gas mode, and alarms

Reports current measured sample flow in LPM

B-14

Reports/sets current reply termination format

B-13

B-43

Reports/sets zero/span valves to sample, zero, or span mode B-35

Reports current mode of sample, zero, or span

Reports/sets current gas units

Simulates pressing help pushbutton

Reports/sets high range averaging time

B-35

B-36

B-31

B-11



Command

high coef 1 no2 high coef 2 no2 high nh3 high nh3 coef high nh3 gas high no high no coef high no gas high no2 high no2 coef high no2 coef 1 high no2 coef 2 high no2 gas high nox high nox coef high nox gas high nt high nt coef high nt gas high range nh3 high range no high range no2 high range nox high range nt host name instr name instrument id internal temp isc (iscreen) layout ack

Description

Reports/sets low range NO

2

coefficient


2

coefficient


Commands

Reports NH

3

concentration calculated with high range coefficients

Reports/sets high range NH

3

coefficients

Reports/sets high range NH

3


Reports NO concentration calculated with high range coefficients

Reports/sets high range NO coefficients

Reports/sets high range NO span gas concentration

Reports NO

2


Reports/sets high range NO

2

coefficients


2

coefficients


2

coefficients


2


Reports NO x


Reports/sets high range NO x

coefficients

Reports/sets high range NO x


Reports N t


Reports/sets high range N t

coefficients

Reports/sets high range N t


Reports/selects current NH

3

high range

Reports/selects current NO high range

Reports/selects current NO

2

high range

Reports/selects current NO x

high range

Reports/selects current N t

high range

Reports/sets host name string

Reports instrument name

Reports/sets instrument id

Reports current internal instrument temperature

Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display

Disables stale layout/layout changed indicator (‘*’)

Page

B-29

B-29

B-12

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-29

B-29

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-43

B-43

B-44

B-13

B-32

B-46

B-29

B-30

B-33

B-33

B-33

B-33

B-33



Commands


Command

le (left) list din list dout list lrec list sp list srec list stream list var aout list var din list var dout low avg time low coef 1 no2 low coef 2 no2 low nh3 low nh3 coef low nh3 gas low no low no coef low no gas low no2 low no2 coef low no2 coef 1 low no2 coef 2 low no2 gas low nox low nox coef low nox gas low nt low nt coef low nt gas

Description

Simulates pressing left pushbutton

Lists current selection for digital input

Lists current selection for digital output

Lists current selection lrec logging data

Lists current selection in the scratchpad list

Lists current selection srec logging data

B-21

B-21

Lists current selection streaming data output B-21

Reports list of analog output, index numbers, and variables B-49

Reports list of digital input, index numbers, and variables

Reports list of digital output, index numbers, and variables

B-49

B-49

Reports/sets low averaging time



2

2

coefficient

coefficient

Reports NH

3

concentration calculated with low range coefficients

Reports/sets low range NH

3

coefficient

Reports/sets low range NH

3


B-11

B-29

B-29

B-12

B-29

B-30

B-12 Reports NO concentration calculated with low range coefficients

Reports/sets low range NO coefficient

Reports/sets low range NO span gas concentration

Reports NO

2


B-29

B-30

B-12





2

2

2

2

coefficient

coefficient

coefficient


Reports NO x


Reports/sets low range NO x

coefficient

Reports/sets low range NO x


Reports N t


Reports/sets low range N t

coefficient

Reports/sets low range N t


B-29

B-29

B-29

B-30

B-12

Page

B-31

B-21

B-21

B-21

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-29

B-30



Command

low range nh3 low range no low range no2 low range nox low range nt lr lrec lrec format lrec layout lrec mem size lrec per malloc lrec malloc srec me (menu) meas mode mode nh3 cal gas nh3 coef nh3 conv temp no no bkg no cal gas no coef no gas no of lrec no of srec no2 cal gas no2 coef no2 coef 1 no2 coef 2 no2 conv temp no2 gas


Commands

Description

Reports/sets current NH

3

low range

Reports/sets current NO low range


2

low range


low range


low range B-33

Outputs long records in the format specified in the command B-22

Outputs long records B-23

Reports/sets output format for long records (ASCII or binary) B-24

Reports current layout of lrec data B-24

Reports maximum number of long records that can be stored B-25

Page

B-33

B-33

B-33

B-33

Reports/sets long record logging period

Reports/sets memory allocation for long records

Reports/sets memory allocation for short records

Simulates pressing menu pushbutton

Reports/sets which measurement mode is active

Reports operating mode in local, service, or remote

Reports/sets NH

3



Reports current NH

3

3

coefficient


Reports current NO concentration

Reports/sets current NO background


Reports/sets current NO coefficient


Reports/sets number of long records stored in memory

Reports/sets number of short records stored in memory

B-25

B-26

B-26

B-31

B-36

B-44

B-12

B-30

B-29

B-13

B-12

B-31

Reports/sets NO

Reports/sets NO

2

2





Reports current NO

2

2

2

2

coefficient

coefficient

coefficient



B-30

B-29

B-30

B-25

B-25

B-12

B-30

B-29

B-29

B-29

B-13

B-30



Commands

B-10 Model 17i Instruction Manual pres pres comp (pc) program no push range mode range nh3 range no range no2 range nox range nt react temp relay stat ri (right) ru (run) sample

Command

nox bkg nox cal gas nox coef nox gas nt cal gas nt coef ozonator ozonator flow ozonator safety ozonator status pmt status pmt supply pmt temp pmt voltage power up mode

Description


Reports/sets NO

Reports/sets NO x x x

background



coefficient


Reports/sets N t



coefficient

Reports/sets ozonator on or off

Reports current ozonator flow

Reports/sets ozonator safety on or off

Reports status of ozonator and safety

Reports/sets PMT status on or off

Sets the PMT on or off

Reports temperature of the PMT cooler (same as cooler temperature)

Reports current PMT voltage

Reports/sets the power up mode which configures the instrument to power up in either the local/unlocked mode or the remote/locked mode.

Reports current reaction chamber pressure

Reports/sets pressure compensation on or off

Reports analyzer program number

Simulates pressing a key on the front panel

Reports/sets current range mode

B-14

B-45


3

range

Reports/sets current NO range


2

range


range


range

Reports current reaction chamber temperature

Reports/sets relay logic status to for the designated relay(s) B-50

Simulates pressing right pushbutton B-31

Simulates pressing run pushbutton

Sets zero/span valves to sample mode

B-31

B-35

B-33

B-33

B-33

B-14

B-14

B-37

B-46

B-31

B-35

B-33

B-33

B-39

B-40

B-40

B-40

B-14

Page

B-12

B-31

B-30

B-29

B-30

B-12

B-30

B-29

B-39

B-39



Measurements

Measurements

Command

sample flow sample gas save save params sc (screen) sp field span span gas sr srec srec format srec layout srec mem size srec per stream per stream time temp comp (tc) time up zero zero gas

Description

Reports current measured sample flow in LPM

Sets zero/span valves to sample gas mode

Stores parameters in FLASH

Stores parameters in FLASH

C-series legacy command that reports a generic response

(Use iscreen instead)

Reports/sets item number and name in scratch pad list

Sets zero/span valves to span mode

Sets zero/span valves to span gas mode

Reports last short record stored

Reports maximum number of short records

B-40

B-33

B-27

B-36

B-36

B-22

B-23

Reports/sets output format for short records (ASCII or binary) B-24

Reports current layout of short record data B-24

Page

B-13

B-35

B-40

Reports maximum number of short records

Reports/sets short record logging period

Reports/sets current set time interval for streaming data

Reports/sets a time stamp to streaming data or not

Reports/sets temperature compensation on or off

Reports/sets current time (24-hour time)

Simulates pressing up pushbutton

Sets zero/span valves to zero mode

Sets zero/span valves to zero gas mode

B-37

B-40

B-31

B-36

B-36

B-25

B-25

B-27

B-28

avg time high avg time low avg time

avg 1 time (high range)

avg 2 time (low range)

These commands report the averaging time in seconds when operating in single range, or averaging time used with the high and low ranges when operating in dual or auto range mode. The example below shows that the averaging time is 300 seconds, according to Table B–2 .

Send:

Receive: avg time 11:300 sec



Measurements

set avg time selection

set high avg time selection

set low avg time selection

set avg 1 time (high range) selection

set avg 2 time (low range) selection

These commands set the averaging time, high and low averaging times, according to Table B–2 . The example below sets the low range averaging time to 120 seconds.

Send:

Receive: set low avg time 8 set low avg time 8 ok

Table B–2. Averaging Times

Selection

Time, NO Measure Mode,

NO x

Measure, or N t

Measure

Mode

Time, NO/NO x

/N t

Measure

Mode

1 2

2 5

3 10

4 20

5 30

6 60

7 90

8 120

20

30

60

90

120

9 180

10 240

11 300

180

240

300


These commands report the measured NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

and N t concentrations when operating in single range, or high and low NO, NO

2

,

NO x

, NH

3

and N t

when operating in dual or auto range mode. The example below shows that the NO concentration is 40 ppb.

Send:

Receive: no no 0.040E+03 ppb




Measurements

capillary temp

This command reports the current capillary chamber temperature. The example below reports that the current capillary chamber temperature is

49.9 °C.

Send:

Receive: capillary temp 49.9 deg C

no2 conv temp conv temp

This command reports the current NO

2

converter temperature. The example below reports that the current converter temperature is 325 °C.

Send:

Receive: no2 conv temp 325 deg C

nh3 conv temp

This command reports the current NH

3

external converter temperature.

The example below reports that the current external converter temperature is 775 °C.

Send:

Receive: nh3 conv temp 775 deg C

cooler temp

This command reports the current PMT cooler temperature. The example below reports that the current PMT cooler temperature is -7.5 °C.

Send:

Receive: pmt temp -7.5 deg C

flow sample flow

These commands report the current measured flow. The example below reports that the flow measurement is 0.400 liters/minute.

Send:

Receive: flow flow 0.4 1/min

internal temp

This command reports the current internal instrument temperature. The first reading is the temperature being used in instrument calculations. The second temperature is the actual temperature being measured. If temperature compensation is on, then both temperature readings are the same. If temperature compensation is off, a temperature of 30 °C is used as the default temperature even though the actual internal temperature is 27.2



Measurements


°C. The example below shows that temperature compensation is on and that the internal temperature is 27.2 °C.

Send:

Receive: internal temp 027.2 deg C, actual 027.2

pmt temp

This command reports the PMT cooler temperature. The example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature is -2.8 °C.

Send:

Receive: pmt temp -2.8 deg C

pmt voltage

This command reports the PMT voltage. The example below reports that the current PMT voltage is -818 volts.

Send:

Receive: pmt voltage -818

pres

This command reports the current reaction chamber pressure. The first pressure reading is the pressure reading being used in instrument calculations. The second pressure is the actual pressure reading being measured. If pressure compensation is on, then both pressure readings are the same. If pressure compensation is off, a pressure of 100 mmHg is used as default pressure even though the actual pressure is 105.2 mmHg. The example below shows that the actual reaction chamber pressure is 105.2 mmHg.

Send:

Receive: pres pres 100.0 mm Hg, actual 105.2

react temp

This command reports the current reaction chamber temperature. The example below reports that the current reaction temperature is 49.9 °C.

Send:

Receive: react temp 49.9 deg C

flags

This reports 8 hexadecimal digits (or flags) that represent the status of the ozonator, PMT, pressure and temperature compensation status, gas units, gas mode, and alarms. To decode the flags, each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B–1 . It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter. In the example below, the instrument is reporting that the ozonator and PMT are both on, that the instrument is in the span gas mode, and that the NO

2

high concentration alarm is activated.


Send: flags


Alarms


Alarms

Figure B–1. Flags

alarm capillary temp min alarm capillary temp max

These commands report the capillary temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the capillary temperature alarm minimum value is 47.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: alarm capillary temp min alarm capillary temp min 47.0 deg C

set alarm capillary temp min value

set alarm capillary temp max value

These commands set the capillary temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the capillary temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example below sets the capillary temperature alarm maximum value to 50.0

°C.



Alarms


Send:

Receive: set alarm capillary temp max 50.0 set alarm capillary temp max 50.0 ok

alarm chamber temp min alarm chamber temp max

These commands report the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the chamber temperature alarm minimum value is 47.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: alarm chamber temp min alarm chamber temp min 47.0 deg C

set alarm chamber temp min value

set alarm chamber temp max value

These commands set the chamber temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the chamber temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example below sets the chamber temperature alarm maximum value to 50.0

°C.

Send:

Receive: set alarm chamber temp max 50.0 set alarm chamber temp max 50.0 ok

alarm conc no min alarm conc no2 min alarm conc nox min alarm conc nh3 min alarm conc no max alarm conc no2 max alarm conc nox max alarm conc nh3 max alarm conc nt min alarm conc nt max

These commands report the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm minimum and maximum values current setting. The example below reports that the NO concentration minimum is 5.2 ppb.

Send:

Receive: alarm conc no min alarm conc no min 5.2 ppb

set alarm conc no min value set alarm conc no max value

set alarm conc no2 min value set alarm conc no2 max value

set alarm conc nox min value

set alarm conc nh3 min value

set alarm conc nox max value

set alarm conc nh3 max value

set alarm conc nt min value set alarm conc nt max value

These commands set the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floatingpoint representation of the concentration alarm limits. Values must be in the units that are currently set for use. The example below sets the NO concentration alarm maximum value to 215.

Send:

Receive: set alarm conc no max 215 set alarm conc no max 215 ok




Alarms

alarm converter temp min alarm converter temp max

These commands report the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the converter temperature alarm minimum value is 300.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: alarm converter temp min alarm converter temp min 300.0 deg C

set alarm converter temp min value

set alarm converter temp max value

These commands set the converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example below sets the converter temperature alarm maximum value to

340.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: set alarm converter temp max 340 set alarm converter temp max 340 ok

alarm ext conv temp min alarm ext conv temp max

These commands report the external converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the converter temperature alarm minimum value is 700.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: alarm ext conv temp min alarm ext conv temp min 700.0 deg C

set alarm ext conv temp min value

set alarm ext conv temp max value

These commands set the external converter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the external converter temperature alarm limits in degrees C.

The example below sets the external converter temperature alarm maximum value to 740.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: set alarm ext conv temp max 740 set alarm ext conv temp max 740 ok

alarm cooler temp min alarm cooler temp max

These commands report the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum value is -10.0 °C.



Alarms


Send:

Receive: alarm cooler temp min alarm cooler temp min -10.0 deg C

set alarm cooler temp min value

set alarm cooler temp max value

These commands set the PMT cooler temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the cooler temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example below sets the cooler temperature alarm maximum value to -2.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: set alarm cooler temp max -2.0 set alarm cooler temp max -2.0 ok

alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp max

These commands report the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 15.0 °C.

Send:

Receive: alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp min 15.0 deg C

set alarm internal temp min value

set alarm internal temp max value

These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C. The example below sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 35.0

°C.

Send:

Receive: set alarm internal temp max 35 set alarm internal temp max 35 ok

alarm pressure min alarm pressure max

These commands report the pressure alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the pressure alarm minimum value is 150 mmHg.

Send:

Receive: alarm pressure min alarm pressure min 150.0 mmHg

set alarm pressure min value

set alarm pressure max value

These commands set the pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to

value, where value is a floating-point number representing the pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury. The example below sets the pressure alarm maximum value to 290 mmHg.




Alarms

Send:

Receive: set alarm pressure max 290 set alarm pressure max 290 ok

alarm sample flow min alarm sample flow max

These commands report the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum value current settings. The example below reports that the sample flow alarm minimum value is 0.350 LPM.

Send:

Receive: alarm sample flow min alarm sample flow min 0.3 l/min

set alarm sample flow min value

set alarm sample flow max value

These commands set the sample flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value, where value is a floating-point number representing the sample flow alarm limits in liters per minute. The example below sets the sample flow alarm maximum value to 1 LPM.

Send:

Receive: set alarm sample flow max 1 set alarm sample flow max 1 ok

alarm trig conc no alarm trig conc no2 alarm trig conc nox alarm trig conc nh3 alarm trig conc nt

This command reports the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm trigger action for minimum alarm, current setting, to either floor or ceiling. The example below shows the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling, according to Table B–3 .

Send:

Receive: alarm trig conc no alarm trig conc no 1

set alarm trig conc no value

set alarm trig conc no2 value

set alarm trig conc nox value

set alarm trig conc nh3 value

set alarm trig conc nt value


2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

concentration alarm minimum value, where value is set to either floor or ceiling, according to Table B–3 . The example below sets the NO concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling.

Send:

Receive: set alarm trig conc no 1 set alarm trig conc no 1 ok



Diagnostics

Diagnostics

Datalogging

Table B–3. Alarm Trigger Values

Value Alarm Trigger

00 Floor

01 Ceiling

diag volt mb

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24, positive 15, positive

5, positive 3.3, and negative 3.3. Each voltage value is separated by a space.

Send:

Receive: diag volt mb 23.90 14.89 4.94 3.27 -3.16

diag volt mib

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24, positive 15, negative 15, positive 5, positive 3.3, and positive 15. Each voltage value is separated by a space.

Send:

Receive: diag volt mib 23.96 14.98 -15.05 4.96 3.27 14.97

diag volt iob

This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I/O expansion board. The sequence of voltages is: Positive 24, positive 5, positive 3.3, and negative 3.3. Each voltage value is separated by a space.

Send:

Receive: diag volt iob 23.96 4.96 3.27 -3.16

clr records

This command will clear all long and short records that have been saved.

Send:

Receive:

set clr lrecs set clr srecs

clr records ok

These commands will clear only the long records or only the short records that have been saved. The example below clears short records.

Send:

Receive: set clr srecs ok




Datalogging

data treatment lrec data treatment srec

These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the long records (lrecs) or short records (srecs). The example below reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec is minimum.

Send:

Receive: data treatment lrec data treatment lrec min

set data treatment lrec string

set data treatment srec string

string = | cur | avg | min | max |

These commands set the data treatment to current, average, minimum, or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the long records (lrecs) or short records (srecs). The example below sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec to minimum.

Send:

Receive: set data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec min ok

list din list dout

These commands report the current selection for the digital outputs in the format. Output no Index number variable name active state. The active state for digital outputs is open or closed. The active state for digital inputs is high or low.

Send:

output state

1 35 CONC ALARM open

3 4 UNITS open

4 11 GEN ALARM closed

7 7 NO MODE open

8 8 NOX MODE open

list lrec list srec list stream list sp

These commands report the list of current selections for long record logging data, short record logging data, streaming data output, or the scratch pad (sp) list. The example below shows the list for streaming data output.



Datalogging


Send:

field variable

x x time

1 1 no

2 2 no2

3 3 nox

4 18 intt

5 25 pres

6 26 smplf

er xy

lr xy

sr xy

x = | 0 | 1 | : Reply termination format (see “set format format” command) y = | 0 | 1 | 2 | : Output format (see “set erec/lrec/srec format format” command)

These commands report the last long and short records stored or the dynamic data record. In the example below, the command requests a long record with no checksum, in ASCII format with text. For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records, see the “flags” command.

Send: lr01

Receive: lr01

22:22 03-24-00 flags 50010000 no 5.150E+03 no2

2.560E+03 nox 7.710E+03 nh3 0.000E-06 nt 7.710E+03 intt

30.967 rctt 49.857 pmtt -3.113 convt 328.932 cvext

746.667 pres 86.554 pmtv -825.101 smplf 0.551

erec

This command returns a brief description of the main operating conditions at the time the command is issued (i.e. dynamic data). The example below shows a typical response. The format is defined by the current settings of

“format” and “erec format” commands. For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records, see the “flags” command.

Send: erec

Receive: erec

22:24 03-24-00 flags 50010000 no 5.150E+03 nox

7.170E+03 nt 7.710E+03 lono 5.150E+03 1 lonox 7.710E+03 lont 7.710E+03 pmtv -825.101 pres 86.554 # of al_temper

0 # of al_flow 0 avgt1 10 avgt2 10 nobkg 9.856 noxbkg

9.670 ntbkg 9.775 lonocoef 1.000 lonoxcoef 1.000 loNTcoef 1.000 lono2coef1 1.000 lono2coef2 1.000 lonh3coef 1.000 norange 20000.000 lonoxrange 20000.000 lontrange 20000.000 lono2range 20000.000 lonh3range

20000.000




Datalogging

lrec srec

lrec xxxx yy

srec xxxx yy

lrec aa:bb oo-pp-qq yy

srec aa:bb oo-pp-qq yy

xxxx = the number of past records

yy = the number of records to return (1 to 10)

aa = hours (01 to 24)

bb = minutes (01 to 59)

oo = month (01 to 12)

pp = day (01 to 31)

qq = year

These commands output long or short records and dynamic data. The output format is determined by the “set lrec format”, and “set srec format” commands. The logging time is determined by the “set lrec per” and “set srec per” commands.

In the following example, there are 740 long records currently stored in memory. When the command lrec 5 is sent, the instrument counts back

100 records from the last record collected (record 740), and then returns 5 records: 640, 641, 642, 643, and 644. For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records, see the “flags” command.

Send:

Receive: lrec 100 5 lrec 100 5

21:40 03-24-00 flags 50010000 no 5.150E+03 no2 2.560+03 nox 7.710E+03 nh3 0.000E-06 nt 7.710E+03 intt 31.015 rctt 49.857 pmtt -2.874 convt 329.194 cvext 757.436 pres 86.850 pmtv -824.731 smplf 0.559







Datalogging

B-24 Model 17i Instruction Manual where: pmtv = PMT Voltage pmtt = PMT Temperature intt = Internal Temperature cptt = Capillary Chamber Temperature rctt = Reaction Chamber Temperature no2 cnvt = NO

2

Converter Temperature nh3 cnvt = NH

3

Converter Temperature safl = Sample Flow ozfl = Ozonator Flow pres = Pressure

erec format lrec format srec format

These commands report the output format for long and short records, and dynamic data in various formats such as ASCII without text, ASCII with text, or binary. The example below shows the output format for long records is ASCII with text, according to Table B–4 .

Send:

set erec format format

set lrec format format

set srec format format

These commands set the output format for long and short records, and dynamic data, according to Table B–4 . The example below sets the long record output format to ASCII with text.

Send:

Receive: set lrec format 1 set lrec format 1 ok

Table B–4. Record Output Formats

Format

0

1

Output Format

ASCII no text

ASCII with text

erec layout lrec layout srec layout




Datalogging

These commands report the layout (string indicating the data formats) for data that is sent out in response to the erec, lrec, srec, and related commands. For details on how to interpret the strings, see “Record Layout

Definition” later in this appendix.

Send:

Receive: lrec layout %s %s %lx %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f %f

%f %f t D L fffffffffffff flags no no2 nox nh3 nt intt pmtt convt cvext pres pmtv smplf

lrec mem size srec mem size

These commands report the long and short records that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for long and short records. To calculate the number of short records per block, add 2 to the number of records, and then divide by the number of blocks. The example below shows that 7 blocks were reserved for long records and the maximum number of long records that can be stored in memory is 1426.

Send:

Receive: lrec mem size lrec mem size 1426 recs, 7 blocks

lrec per srec per

These commands report the long and short records logging period. The example below shows that the short record logging period is 5 minutes.

Send:

Receive: srec per 5 min

set lrec per value

set srec per value

value = | 1 | 5 | 15 | 30 | 60 |

These commands set the long and short records logging period to value in minutes. The example below sets the long record logging period to 15 minutes.

Send:

Receive: set lrec per 15 set lrec per 15 ok

no of lrec no of srec

These commands report the number of long and short records stored in the long and short records memory. The example below shows that 50 long records have been stored in the memory.



Datalogging


Send:

Receive: no of lrec no of lrec 50 recs

malloc lrec malloc srec

These commands report the currently set memory allocation for long and short records in percent of total memory.

Send:

Receive: malloc lrec 10 %

set malloc lrec value

set malloc srec value

value = 0 to 100

These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for long and short records to value, where value is a floating-point number representing percent. The example below sets the memory allocation for long records to

10.

Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logging data memory. All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands, if required. ▲

Send:

Receive: set malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec 10 ok

set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream

These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad (sp) into the long record, short record, or streaming data list. The example below copies the current list in scratch pad into the long records list.

Send:

Receive: set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to lrec ok

set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp

These commands copy the current contents of the long record, short record, or streaming data list into the scratch pad (sp). These commands are useful in easy modification of current long record, short record, or streaming data lists. The example below copies the current list of long records into the scratch pad.




Datalogging

Send:

Receive: set copy lrec to sp set copy lrec to sp ok

sp field number

This command reports the variable number and name stored at index in the scratch pad list. The example below shows that the field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 13, which is for the variable pressure.

Send:

Receive: sp field 5 sp field 5 13 pres

set sp field number value

number = 1-32 is the maximum number of fields in long and short record lists.

number = 1-18 is for streaming data lists.

This command sets the scratch pad field number (item number in scratch pad list) to value, where value is the index number of a variable in the analog out variable list. Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command “list var aout”. The “set sp field” command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the long record, short record, or streaming data lists, using the “set copy sp to lrec”, “set copy sp to srec”, or “set copy sp to stream” commands.

Send:

Receive: set sp field 1 34 set sp field 1 34 ok

stream per

This command reports the currently set time interval in seconds for streaming data.

Send:

set stream per number value

number value = | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 20 | 30 | 60 | 90 |120 | 180 | 240 | 300 |

This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds. The example below sets the number value to 10 seconds.

Send:

Receive: set stream per 10 set stream per 10 ok



Calibration

Calibration

stream time

This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not, according to Table B–5 .

Send:

Receive: stream time 0

set stream time value

This command enables value, where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string, according to Table B–5 . The example below attaches a time stamp to streaming data.

Send:

Receive: set stream time 00 set stream time 00 ok

Table B–5. Stream Time Values

Value

00

01

Stream Time

Attaches time stamp to streaming data string

Disables time stamp to streaming data string

set cal bkg no set cal bkg nox set cal bkg nt set cal no bkg set cal nox bkg

These commands will auto-calibrate the NO, NO x

, and N t

backgrounds. If the instrument is set to manual NO x

mode, the response to “set cal no bkg” will be, “can’t, wrong settings”. The example below shows a successful auto-calibration of the NO background.

Send:

Receive: set cal bkg no set cal bkg no ok

set cal coef no set cal coef 1 no2 set cal coef 2 no2 set cal coef nox set cal coef nh3 set cal coef nt set cal no coef set cal no2 coef set cal nox coef set cal high no coef set cal high no2 coef set cal high nox coef set cal high nh3 coef set cal high nt coef set cal low no coef set cal low no2 coef set cal low nox coef set cal low nh3 coef




Calibration

These commands will auto-calibrate NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t coefficients based on NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

span gas concentrations. The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode. If the mode is incorrect, the instrument responds with

“can’t, wrong settings”. The example below shows a successful autocalibration of the low NO coefficient.

Send:

Receive: set cal low no coef set cal low no coef ok

coef no coef 1 no2 coef 2 no2 coef no2 coef nox coef nh3 coef nt no coef high no coef high no2 coef 1 high no2 coef 2 high no2 coef high nox coef high nh3 coef high nt coef low no coef high coef 1 no2 high coef 2 no2 low coef 1 no2 low coef 2 no2 no2 coef 1 no2 coef 2 no2 coef nox coef low no2 coef 1 low no2 coef 2 low no2 coef low nox coef nh3 coef nt coef low nh3 coef low nt coef

These commands report NO, NO x

, NH

3

, N t

, and two NO

2

coefficients in single range mode, or the high and low range coefficients in dual or auto range mode. If the mode is incorrect, the instrument responds with “can’t, wrong settings”. The example below reports that the NO coefficient is

1.000.

Send:

Receive: coef no 1.000

set coef no value set high no coef value set high coef 1 no2 value

set coef 1 no2 value set high no2 coef 1 value set high coef 2 no2 value

set coef 2 no2 value set high no2 coef 2 value set low coef 1 no2 value

set coef no2 value set high no2 coef value set low coef 2 no2 value

set coef nox value set high nox coef value

set coef nh3 value set high nh3 coef value

set coef nt value

set no coef value

set high nt coef value

set low no coef value

set no2 coef 1 value set low no2 coef 1 value

set no2 coef 2 value set low no2 coef 2 value

set no2 coef value set low no2 coef value

set nox coef value set low nox coef value

set nh3 coef value set low nh3 coef value

set nt coef value set low nt coef value



Calibration


These commands set the NO, NO x

, NH

3

, N t

, and two NO

2

coefficients to user-defined values to value, where value is a floating-point representation of the coefficient. The example below sets the NO coefficient to 1.005.

Send:

Receive: set no coef 1.005 set no coef 1.005 ok

no2 cal gas nox cal gas nh3 cal gas nt cal gas cal gas no cal gas no2 cal gas nox cal gas nh3 cal gas nt high no gas high no2 gas high nox gas high nh3 gas high nt gas low no gas low no2 gas low nox gas low nh3 gas no2 gas

These commands report NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

span gas concentrations used to auto-calibrate NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t coefficients. The high and low commands are only available in dual and auto range mode. If the mode is incorrect, the instrument responds with

“can’t, wrong settings”. The example below reports that the NO calibration gas is 40.0 ppb.

Send:

Receive: cal gas no 0.040E+04 ppb

set no cal gas value

set no2 cal gas value

set nox cal gas value

set nh3 cal gas value

set nt cal gas value

set cal gas no value

set cal gas no2 value

set cal gas nox value

set nox gas value

set high no gas value

set high no2 gas value

set high nox gas value

set high nh3 gas value

set high nt gas value

set low no gas value

set low no2 gas value

set cal gas nh3 value

set cal gas nt value

set no gas value

set no2 gas value

set low nox gas value

set low nh3 gas value

set low nt gas value


2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

span gas concentrations used by the auto-calibration routine to value, where value is a floating-point representation of the gas concentration in current selected units. The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user. The example below sets the NO calibration gas to 810.0 ppb.


Keys/Display


Keys/Display

Send:

Receive: set cal gas no 810.0 set cal gas no 810.0 ok

bkg no bkg nox bkg nt no bkg nox bkg

These commands report the current NO, NO x

, and N t

backgrounds. The example below reports that the NO background is 5.5 ppb.

Send:

Receive: bkg no 5.5 ppb

set bkg no value

set bkg nox value

set bkg nt value

set no bkg value

set nox bkg value

These commands are used to set NO, NO x

, and N t

backgrounds to userdefined values to value, where value is a floating-point representation of the background in current selected units. The example below sets the NO background to 5.5 ppb.

Send:

Receive: set bkg no 5.5 set bkg no 5.5 ok

push button

do down en enter he help le

1

2

3

4 left me menu ri right ru run up

button = | do | down | en | enter | he | help | le | left | me | menu | ri | right | ru | run | up | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |

These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons. The numbers represent the front-panel soft keys, from left to right.



Keys/Display


Send:

Receive: push enter ok

isc iscreen

This command retrieves the framebuffer data used for the display on the

i

Series instrument. It is 19200 bytes in size, 2-bits per pixel, 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters. The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission. It is sent as a type '5' binary C-Link response with no checksum.

The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8-bit count of consecutive 0xFF bytes. The following 'c' code will expand the incoming data. void unpackDisplay ( void far* tdib, unsigned char far* rlescreen )

{ int i,j,k; unsigned char far *sc4bpp, *sc2bpp, *screen, *ptr; ptr = screen = (unsigned char far *)malloc(19200);

//RLE decode the screen

for (i=0; i<19200 && (ptr - screen) < 19200; i++)

{

*(ptr++) = *(rlescreen + i); if (*(rlescreen + i) == 0)

{ unsigned char rlecount = *(unsigned char *)(rlescreen + ++i); while (rlecount)

{

}

}

*(ptr++) = 0; rlecount--; else if (*(rlescreen + i) == 0xff)

{

unsigned char rlecount = *(unsigned char *)(rlescreen + ++i);

while (rlecount)

{

*(ptr++) = 0xff; rlecount--;

}

}

}



Measurement Configuration

To convert this data into a BMP for use with windows, it needs to be turned into a 4BPP as that is the smallest windows can display. Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data, i.e. the top display line is the last line in the BMP.

sc screen

This command is meant for backward compatibility on the C series. Screen information is reported using the “iscreen” command above.

Send: screen

Receive: screen

This is an I series

Measurement

Configuration

available

no high nh3

high nt

low no

low no2 nt low nox high range nox

These commands report NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

range in single range mode, or the high and low ranges in dual or auto range mode. If the mode is incorrect, the instrument responds with “can’t, wrong settings”.

The example below reports that the NO full-scale range is set to 50 ppb, according to Table B–6 and Table B–7 .

Send:

Receive: range no 0: 5.000E+01 ppb

set range no selection

set range no2 selection

set range nox selection

set range nh3 selection

set range nt selection

set high range no selection

set high range no2selection

set high range nox selection

set high range nh3 selection

set high range nt selection

set low range no selection

set low range no2 selection

set low range nox selection

set low range nh3 selection

set low range nt selection

These commands select the NO, NO

2

, NO x

, NH

3

, and N t

full-scale ranges, according to Table B–6 and Table B–7 . The example below sets the NO full-scale range to 2,000 ppb.




Send:

Receive: set range no 5 set range no 5 ok

Table B–6. Standard Ranges

Selection ppb ppm μgm

3 mgm

3

10 C2 C2 C2 C2

11 C3 C3 C3 C3

Table B–7. Extended Ranges

Selection ppb ppm μgm

3 mgm

3

0 200 0.2 500 0.5


5

6

10,000 10 20,000 20

20,000 20 50,000 50

8 100,000 100 150,000 150

9 C1 C1 C1 C1

10 C2 C2 C2 C2

11 C3 C3 C3 C3

custom range

range = | 1 | 2 | 3 |





This command reports the user-defined value of custom range 1, 2, or 3.

The example below reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5.50 ppb.

Send:

Receive: custom 1 .550E+01 ppb

set custom range range value

set custom 1 value



set custom 1 range value



These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1, 2, or 3 to range value, where value is a floating-point number representing concentration in ppb ppm, μg/m

3

or mg/m

3

. The example below sets the custom 1 range to 55.5 ppb.

Send:

Receive: set custom 1 range 55.5 set custom 1 range 55.5 ok

range mode

This command reports the current range mode.

Send:

Receive: range mode single

set range mode mode

This command sets the current range mode to single, dual, or auto. The example below sets the range mode to single.

Send:

Receive: set range mode single set range mode single ok

gas mode gas

This command reports the current mode of sample, zero, or span. The example below reports that the gas mode is sample.

Send:

Receive: gas sample

set sample set sample gas

set gas 0 (sample)

These commands set the zero/span valves to the sample mode. The example below sets the instrument to sample mode, that is, the instrument is reading the sample gas.





Send:

set zero set zero gas

set gas 1 (zero)

These commands set the zero/span valves to the zero mode. The example below sets the instrument to zero mode, that is, the instrument is reading the sample gas.

Send:

Receive: set ok

set span set span gas

set gas 2 (span)

These commands set the zero/span valves to the span mode. The example below sets the instrument to span mode, that is, the instrument is sampling span gas.

Send:

Receive: set ok

gas unit gu

These commands report the current gas units (ppb, ppm, μg/m

3

, or mg/m

3

). The example below reports that the gas unit is set to ppb.

Send:

Receive: gas ppb

set gas unit

set gu d

unit = | ppb | ppm | μg/m

3

| mg/m

3

|

d = | 0 (ppb) | 1 (ppm) | 2 (

μ g/m

3

) | 3 (mg/m

3

) |

These commands set the gas units to ppb, ppm, μg/m

3

, or mg/m

3

. The example below sets the gas units to mg/m

3

.

Send:

Receive: set gas unit mg/m3 set gas unit mg/m3 ok

meas mode

This command reports which measurement mode (NO/NO x

/N t

, NO,

NO x

, or N t

) is active. The example below reports that the measurement mode is set to NO.

Send:

Receive: meas no


Hardware

Configuration


Hardware Configuration

set meas mode mode

mode = | no/nox/nt | no | nox | nt |

This command sets the instrument to NO/NO x

/N t

(auto) mode, manual

NO mode, NO x

mode, or manual N t

mode. The example below sets the instrument to the manual NO mode.

Send:

Receive: set meas mode no set meas mode no ok

pres comp pc

These commands report whether pressure compensation is on or off. The example below shows that pressure compensation is on.

Send:

Receive: pres on

set pres comp onoff

set tc d

d = | 0 (off) | 1 (on) |

These commands turn the pressure compensation on or off. The example below turns pressure compensation off.

Send:

Receive: set pres comp off set pres comp off ok

temp comp tc

These commands report whether temperature compensation is on or off.

The example below shows the temperature compensation is off.

Send:

Receive: temp off

set temp comp onoff

set tc d

d = | 0 (off) | 1 (on) |

These commands turn the temperature compensation on or off. The example below turns temperature compensation off.

Send:

Receive: set temp comp off set temp comp off ok

contrast

This command reports the screen’s level of contrast. The example below shows the screen contrast is 50%, according to Table B–8 .





Send: contrast

set contrast level

This command sets the screen’s level of contrast, according to Table B–8 .

The example below sets the contrast level to 50%.

Send:

Receive: set contrast 5 ok

Table B–8. Contrast Levels

Level

Contrast Level

0 0%

1 10%

2 20%

3 30%

4 40%

5 50%

6 60%

7 70%

8 80%

9 90%

10 100%

conv set temp

This command reports the temperature that the NO

2

converter is set to.

The example below reports that the converter temperature is set to 325 °C.

Send:

Receive: conv set temp conv set temp 325 deg C

set conv set temp value

This command sets the temperature that the NO

2

converter is set to, where

value is an integer representing degrees C. The example below sets the converter temperature to 325 °C.

Send:

Receive: set conv set temp 325 set conv set temp 325 ok

date

This command reports the current date. The example below reports the date as December 1, 2004.





Send: date

set date mm-dd-yy

mm = month

dd = day

yy = year

This command sets the date of the analyzer’s internal clock. The example below sets the date to December 1, 2004.

Send:

Receive: set date 12-01-04 ok

set default params

This command sets all the parameters to their default values. This does not affect the factory-calibrated parameters.

Send:

Receive: set default params set default params ok

ozonator

This command reports the ozonator is on or off. The example below reports that the ozonator is on.

Send: ozonator

set ozonator onoff

These commands set the ozonator on or off. The example below sets the ozonator off.

Send:

Receive: set ozonator off ok

ozonator flow

This command reports the current ozonator flow. The example below reports that the current ozonator flow is 0.050 LPM.

Send:

Receive: ozonator flow 0.050 l/m

ozonator safety

This command reports the status of the ozonator safety on or off. The example below reports that the ozonator safety is on.

Send:





set ozonator safety onoff

These commands set the ozonator safety on or off. The example below sets the ozonator safety off.

Send:

Receive: set ozonator safety off set ozonator safety off ok

ozonator status

This command reports the status of the ozonator and safety. The example below reports that the ozonator is off.

Send:

pmt status pmt

These commands report the status of the PMT on or off. The example below reports that the PMT is on.

Send:

set pmt supply onoff

set pmt onoff

These commands set the PMT on or off. The example below turns the

PMT off.

Send:

Receive: set pmt supply off set pmt supply off ok

save set save params

These commands store all current parameters in FLASH memory. It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed, that this command be sent. If changes are not saved, they will be lost in the event of a power failure. The example below saves the parameters to FLASH memory.

Send:

Receive: set save params ok

time

This command reports the current time (24-hour time). The example below reports that the internal time is 2:15:30 pm.

Send: time



Communications Configuration

set time hh:mm:ss

hh = hours

mm = minutes

ss = seconds

This command sets the internal clock (24-hour time). The example below sets the internal time to 2:15 pm.

Note If seconds are omitted, the seconds default to 00. ▲

Communications

Configuration

Send:

Receive: set time 14:15 ok

addr dns

This command reports the TCP/IP address for the domain name server.

Send:

Receive: addr dns 192.168.1.1

set addr dns address

This command sets the dns address, where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by “.”.

Send:

Receive: set addr dns 192.168.1.1 set addr dns 192.168.1.1 ok

addr gw

This command reports the default TCP/IP gateway address.

Send:

Receive: addr gw 192.168.1.1

set addr gw address

This command sets the default gateway address, where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by “.”.

Send:

Receive: set addr gw 192.168.1.1 set addr gw 192.168.1.1 ok

addr ip

This command reports the IP address of the analyzer.

Send:

Receive: addr ip 192.168.1.15

set addr ip address

This command sets the analyzer’s IP address, where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by “.”.





Send:

Receive: set addr ip 192.168.1.15 set addr ip 192.168.1.15 ok

addr nm

This command reports the IP netmask.

Send:

Receive: addr nm 255.255.255.0

set addr nm address

This command sets the nm address, where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0-255 inclusive, separated by “.”.

Send:

Receive: set addr nm 255.255.255.0 set addr nm 255.255.255.0 ok

baud

This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port

(RS232/RS485). The example below reports that the current baud rate is

9600 baud.

Send: baud

set baud rate

rate = | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 |

This command sets the instrument baud rate. The example below sets the instrument’s baud rate to 9600.

Note After the command is sent, the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument.

▲

Send:

Receive: set baud 9600 ok

dhcp

This command reports the current state of use of DHCP on or off. DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the analyzer automatically. The example below shows that DHCP is on.

Send: dhcp

set dhcp onoff

These commands enables and disables the DHCP service by either on or

off. Changes to this parameter will only take effect when the analyzer is powered up. The example below sets the DHCP service on.





Note When DHCP is set to on, the user-supplied addr gw, addr dns, addr ip, and addr nm parameters are not used. ▲

Send:

Receive: set dhcp on ok

format

This command reports the current reply termination format. The example below shows that the reply format is 00, which means reply with no checksum, according to Table B–9 .

Send: format

set format format

This command sets the reply termination format, where format is set according to Table B–9 . The example below sets the reply termination format to checksum.

Send:

Receive: set format 01 ok

Table B–9. Reply Termination Formats

Format

Reply Termination

00 <CR>

01 <NL> sum xxxx <CR> where xxxx = 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters (bytes) in the message

host name

This command reports the host name string.

Send:

Receive: host iSeries

set host name string

This command sets the host name string, where string is 1-13 alphanumeric characters.

Send:

Receive: set host name analyzer01 set host name analyzer01 ok

instr name

This command reports the instrument name.





Send:

instrument id

This command reports the instrument id.

Send:

Receive: instrument id 17

set instrument id value

This command sets the instrument id to value, where value is a decimal number between 0 and 127 inclusive.

Note Sending this command via RS-232 or RS-485 will require the host to use the new id for subsequent commands. ▲

Send:

Receive: set instrument id 20 set instrument id 20 ok

mode

This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in: local, service, or remote. The example below shows that the instrument is in the remote mode.

Send: mode

set mode local set mode remote

These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode. The example below sets the instrument to the local mode.

Send:

Receive: set mode local ok

allow mode cmd

This command reports the current allow mode setting which configures the instrument to either accept or ignore the “set mode local” or “set mode remote” commands. The example below shows that the instrument is configured to ignore the instrument commands, according to Table B–10 .

Receive: allow mode cmd 0





set allow mode cmd value

This command configures the instrument to value, where value is either accept or ignore the “set mode local” or “set mode remote” commands, according to Table B–10 . If the instrument is set to accept, the “set mode local” will unlock the instrument, and keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel and the “set mode remote” will lock the instrument, and keypad cannot be used to make changes via front panel. If the instrument is set to ignore, the instrument will respond with “ok” as if the command has been accepted and acted upon, but will not change the instrument lock status. The example below sets the instrument to accept the “set mode local” or “set mode remote commands.

Note The instrument will always respond to the command “mode” with the status of the password lock as “mode local” or “mode remote”, irrespective of the above setting. ▲

Send: set allow mode cmd 1

Receive: set allow mode cmd 1 ok

Table B–10. Allow Mode Command Values

Value

Allow Mode Command

1 Ignore

power up mode

This command reports the current power up mode setting, according to, according to Table B–11 . The example that follows shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote/locked mode.

Receive: power up mode 1

set power up mode value

This command sets the instrument to power up mode value, where value is set to either local/unlocked mode or remote/locked mode, according to

Table B–11 . If the instrument is set to power up in the local/unlocked mode, the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel. If the instrument is set to power up in the remote/unlocked mode, changes can not be made from the front panel. The example below sets the instrument to power up in remote/locked mode.



I/O Configuration

Receive: set power up mode 1 ok

Table B–11. Power Up Mode Values

Value

Power up Mode

I/O Configuration

program no

This command reports the analyzer’s model information and program version number, which will be dependant on the current version.

Send:

Receive: program no iSeries 17i 01.00.01.074

set layout ack

This command disables the stale layout/layout change indicator (‘*’) that is attached to each response if the layout has changed.

Send:

Receive: set layout ack ok

analog iout range channel

This command reports the analog current output range setting for channels, where channel must be between 1 and 6, inclusive. The example below reports current output channel 4 to the 4-20 mA range, according to Table

B–12 . This command responds with “feature not enabled” if the I/O expansion board is not detected.

Send:

Receive: analog iout range 4 analog iout range 4 2

set analog iout range channel range

This command sets analog current output channel to the channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, and range is set according to

Table B–12 . The example below sets current output channel 4 to the 0-20 mA range. This command responds with “feature not enabled” if the I/O expansion board is not detected.

Send:

Receive: set analog iout range 4 1 set analog iout range 4 1 ok




I/O Configuration

Table B–12. Analog Current Output Range Values

Range Output Range

0 [cannot be set to this, but may report] Undefined

analog vin channel

This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data, both the calculated value and the actual voltage. In the example below, the

“calculated” value of channel 1 is 75.325 degrees F, volts are 2.796. This command responds with “feature not enabled” if the I/O expansion board is not detected.

Send:

Receive: analog vin 1 75.325 2.796 V

analog vout range channel

This command reports the analog voltage output channel range, where

channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, according to Table B–13 .

Send:

Receive: analog vout range 2 analog vout range 2 3

set analog vout range channel range

This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range, where

channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive, and range is set according to Table B–

13 . The example below sets channel 2 to the 0-10 V range.

Send:

Receive: set analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range 2 3 ok

Table B–13. Analog Voltage Output Range Values

Range Output Range

0 [cannot be set to this, but may report] Undefined



I/O Configuration


dig in

This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4-digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit (MSB) being input 16.

Send:

Receive: dig in 0xff7f

din channel

This command reports the action assigned to input channel and the corresponding active state. The example below reports the input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of “analog outputs to zero” with the active state being high.

Send:

Receive: din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high

set din channel index state

This command assigns digital input channel (1-16) to activate the action indicated by index (1-35), when the input transitions to the designated state

(high or low). Use “list din var” command to obtain the list of supported

index values and corresponding actions.

Send:

Receive: set din 1 3 high set din 1 3 high ok

dout channel

This command reports the index number and output variable and the active state assigned to output channel. The example below reports the input 2 to be assigned an index number 2 corresponding to “local/remote” with the active state being open.

Send:

Receive: dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open

set dout channel index state

This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index, and assigns it an active state of state (open or closed).

Send:

Receive: set dout 4 11 open set dout 4 11 open ok

dtoa channel

This reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters, according to Table B–14 . The example below shows that the D/A #1 is

97.7% full-scale.




I/O Configuration

Send:

Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output, and that output is selected, the value will be 0.0. ▲

All channel ranges are user definable. If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration, the default selections may not apply. ▲

Table B–14. Default Output Assignment

5

6

7

D to A

1

Function Single Range Dual Range

Voltage Output NO Low NO x

Auto Range

High/Low

NO x

High Status

NO

2

Low NH

3

NH

3

High Status

Voltage Output Not Used

Voltage Output Not Used

Current Output NO

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Low NO x

High/Low

NO x

High Status

NO

2

Low NH

3

10 Current High

11 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used

12 Current Output Not Used Not Used Not Used

list var aout list var dout list var din

These commands report the list of index numbers, and the variables

(associated with that index number) available for selection in the current mode (determined by single/dual/auto, gas mode) for analog output, digital output and digital inputs. The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using “set sp field index”. The example below reports the list of analog output, index numbers, and variables.

Send:

Receive: list var aout list var aout



I/O Configuration


relay stat

This command reports the current relay logic normally “open” or normally

“closed,” if all the relays are set to same state, that is all open or all closed.

The example below shows that the status when all the relays logic is set to normally “open”.

Send:

Receive: relay stat open

Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4-digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte (LSB) being relay no 1. ▲

For example:

Receive:

Receive: relay stat 0x0001 (indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic, all others are normally closed) relay stat 0x0005 (indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic, all others are normally closed)

set relay open

set relay open value

set relay closed

set relay closed value

These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value, where value is the relay between 1 and 16. The example below sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open.



Record Layout Definition

Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open/closed. ▲

Send:

Receive: set relay open 1 set relay open 1 ok

Record Layout

Definition

The Erec, Lrec Srec layouts contain the following:

●

●

A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses

A format specifier for parsing binary responses

In addition to these the Erec Layout contains:

●

A format specifier for producing the front-panel displays

Values are read in using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations (32-bit floats or 32-bit integers). These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front-panel display. Normally, the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it (such as, all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an 'f' output specifier, and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a 'd' specifier).

Format Specifier for

ASCII Responses

The first line of the Layout response is the scanf-like parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII ERec response. Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a \n (the normal line separator character). Valid fields are:

%s - parse a string

%d - parse a decimal number

%ld - parse a long (32-bit) decimal number

%f - parse a floating point number

%x - parse a hexadecimal number

%lx - parse a long (32-bit) hex number

%* - ignore the field

Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter; it is handled automatically. ▲





Binary Responses

The second line of the Layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response. Parameters MUST be separated by spaces, and the line is terminated by a '\n'. Valid fields are: t - parse a time specifier (2 bytes)

D - parse a date specifier (3 bytes) i - ignore one 8-bit character (1 byte) e - parse a 24-bit floating point number (3 bytes: n/x)

E - parse a 24-bit floating point number (3 bytes: N/x) f - parse a 32-bit floating point number (4 bytes) c - parse an 8-bit signed number (1 byte)

C - parse an 8-bit unsigned number (1 byte) n - parse a 16-bit signed number (2 bytes)

N - parse a 16-bit unsigned number (2 bytes) m - parse a 24-bit signed number (3 bytes)

M - parse a 24-bit unsigned number (3 bytes) l - parse a 32-bit signed number (4 bytes)

L - parse a 32-bit unsigned number (4 bytes)

There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out, the resulting value is to be divided by 10^d. Thus the 16-bit field 0xFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier 'n3' as the number -0.058.


EREC Layout

The subsequent lines in the ERec Layout response describe the appearance of the full panel. The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines. Each line is composed of three major components:

(1) a text field, (2) a value field, and (3) a button. None of these three components is required. The text field contains statically displayed text.

The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a

DATA/ERec command. It also displays, though background changes, alarm status. The button, when pressed, triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list. There are five kinds of buttons, B, I, L, T, and N.

Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display. The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands.

Text

The first field in the layout string is the text. It is delimited by a ':'. The string up to the first ':' will be read and inserted in the text field of the line.




Value String

This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field.

Value Source

The value source, which is the item (or word) number in the DATA/ERec response, appears next. This is followed by an optional bitfield designator.

The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string 's', hexadecimal 'x', decimal 'd', or floating point 'f', or binary 'b' number.

Typically, bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers.

Floating-point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf's %f format (e.g., a field of '4' would be translated into the printf command of '%.3f').

Alternately, the special character '*' can precede the precision specifier; this causes an indirection on the precision specifier (which now becomes a field number).

This is useful when formatting, for example, numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument.

Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print. For example, the specifier 'b4' will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number.

There are serious restrictions on where an 's' field may appear: currently sources 1 and 2 must be 's', and no others may be 's'.

Alarm Information

The value source is followed by optional alarm information, indicated by a commercial at sign '@' with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator.

All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long (low and high). The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source. Typical alarm information would appear as '@6.4'.

Translation Table

Then, there appears an optional translation table within braces '{}'. This is a string of words separated by spaces. An example translation table would be '{Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3}'. The value, once extracted is used as a zero-based index into the translation table to determine the string to display.

Selection Table

Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses '(...)'.

This is a string of numbers separated by spaces '(0 1)'. The selection table



Record Layout Definition lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter. This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed.

Button Designator

Then there appears an optional button designator. This will be one of 'B',

'I', 'L', 'T', or 'N'.

B- Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format. The input format is specified from the 'B' through the subsequent semicolon.

I—Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation. That is, the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options.

L—Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation. The output value is number of the selected option.

T—Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation. The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string.

N—Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument. No user-prompting happens.

The following string through an optional ‘|’ or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection. The command string should normally contain print-style formatting to include the user input. If a ‘|’ is present, it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field.

This is not currently used.

Examples

Some examples ('\n' is the C syntax for an end-of-line character):

'Concentrations\n'

This is a single text-only line.

'\n'

This is a single blank line.





This is a line which appears slightly indented. The text field is 'NO', the value is taken from the third element of the data response, and interpreted as a string.

' NO:18sBd.ddd;set no coef %s\n'

This is a line which also appears slightly indented. The next field is also

'NO', but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response, again interpreted as a string. A button appears on this line which, when pressed, pops up an input dialog which will state "Please enter a new value for NO using a d.ddd format." The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command. If the user enters, for example, '1.234', the constructed command will be 'set no coef 1.234'.

' NO:21f{Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 Code_4 Code_5 Code_6

Code_7 Code_8 Code_9 Code_10 Code_11}Lset range no %d\n'

This is a line which appears slightly indented, the title is again 'NO', and the value the twenty-first element of the data response, interpreted as a floating-point number. There is a no-translation button which creates a selection list of twelve "Code nn" options. The number of the user selection is used to create the output command.

%s\n'

'Mode:6.12-13x{local remote service service}(0 1)Tset mode

This is a line which has a title of 'Mode', and value taken from the sixth field of the data response. There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through

13 from the source (the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string). Once the bits have been extracted, they are shifted down to the bit-zero position. Thus, the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3. The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value, the zeroth value appearing first (0 -> local, 1 -> remote, etc.). The selection list shows that only the first two values, in this case, are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed.

The 'T' button indicates full translation, input code to string, and user selection number to output string.

'\xC'

This is a line that starts a new column (the \xC or ^L),




' Comp:6.11x{off on}Tset temp comp %s\n'

This shows that the bitfield end (the second part of a bitfield specification) is optional. The bitfield will be one bit long, starting in this case at the eleventh bit.

'Background:7f*8Bd.ddd;set o3 bkg %s\n'

This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays. The background value is taken from the 7th element, and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th. If the asterisk were not present, it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed.


Appendix C

MODBUS Protocol

This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485 (RTU protocol) as well as TCP/IP over Ethernet.

The MODBUS Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document. The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other analog values or variables, read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer, and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument. This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS commands listed below.

For details of the Model 17i MODBUS Protocol specification, see the following topics:

●

●

●

●

“ Serial Communication Parameters ” on page C-1

“ TCP Communication Parameters ” on page C-2

“ Application Data Unit Definition ” on page C-2

“ Function Codes ” on page C-3

●

“ MODBUS Parameters Supported ” on page C-8

Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http://www.modbus.org

. References are from MODBUS Application

Protocol Specification V1.1a MODBUS-IDA June 4, 2004.

Serial Communication

Parameters

The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol.

Number of Data bits

Number of Stop bits

: 8

: 1

Data rate : from 1200-115200 Baud (9600 is default)

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual C-1

MODBUS Protocol

TCP Communication Parameters

TCP Communication

Parameters

i

Series Instruments support the MODBUS/TCP protocol. The register definition is the same as for the serial interface.

TCP connection port for MODBUS : 502

Application Data

Unit Definition

Here are the MODBUS ADU (Application Data Unit) formats over serial and TCP/IP:

Serial: Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check

TCP/IP: MBAP Header Function Code Data

Slave Address

The MODBUS save address is a single byte in length. This is the same as the instrument ID used for C-Link commands and can be between 1 and

127 decimal (i.e. 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex). This address is only used for

MODBUS RTU over serial connections.

Note Device ID ‘0’ used for broadcast MODBUS commands, is not supported. Device IDs 128 through 247 (i.e. 0x80 hex to 0xF7 hex) are not supported because of limitations imposed by C-Link. ▲

MBAP Header

In MODBUS over TCP/IP, a MODBUS Application Protocol Header

(MBAP) is used to identify the message. This header consists of the following components:

Transaction Identifier

Protocol Identifier

Length

Unit Identifier

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

1 Byte

0x0000 to 0xFFFF (Passed back in response)

0x00 (MODBUS protocol)

0x0000 to 0xFFFF (Number of following bytes)

0x00 to 0xFF (Passed back in response)

C-2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

MODBUS Protocol

Function Codes

A Slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP/IP because the higher-level protocols include device addressing. The unit identifier is not used by the instrument.

Function Code

The function code is a single byte in length. The following function codes are supported by the instrument:

Read Coils

Read Inputs

: 0x01

: 0x02

Read Holding Registers

Read Input Registers

: 0x03

: 0x04

Force (Write) Single Coil

Read Exception Status

: 0x05

: 0x06

If a function code is received that is not in this list, an invalid function exception is returned.

Data

The data field varies depending on the function. For more description of these data fields, see “Function Codes” below.

Error Check

In MODBUS over Serial an error check is included in the message. This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP/IP because the higher-level protocols ensure error-free transmission. The error check is a two-byte (16 bit) CRC value.

Function Codes

This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the

Model 17i.

(0x01/0x02) Read Coils /

Read Inputs

Read Coils / Inputs read the status of the digital outputs (relays) in the instrument. Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response.

These requests specify the starting address, i.e. the address of the first output specified, and the number of outputs. The outputs are addressed starting at zero. Therefore, outputs numbered 1–16 are addressed as 0–15.


MODBUS Protocol

Function Codes

The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field. Status is indicated as 1 = Active (on) and 0 – Inactive (off). The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query. The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte, and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes. If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight, the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros (toward the high order end of the byte). The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data.

Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument, as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open. ▲

Request

Function code

Starting Address

Quantity of outputs

Unit Identifier

1 Byte

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

1 Byte

0x01 or 0x02

0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument

1 to maximum allowed by instrument

0x00 to 0xFF (Passed back in response)

Response

Function code

Byte count

Output Status

1 Byte

1 Byte n Byte

0x01 or 0x02

N*

N = N or N+1

*N = Quantity of Outputs / 8, if the remainder not equal to zero, then N=N+1

Error Response

Function code

Exception code

1 Byte

1 Byte

0x01 or 0x02

01=Illegal Function, 02=Illegal Address,

03=Illegal Data, 04=Slave Device Failure

Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2–15:

C-4 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific

MODBUS Protocol

Function Codes

Request

Field Name (Hex)

Function 0x01

Starting Address Hi 0x00

Starting Address Lo

Quantity of Outputs Hi

Quantity of Outputs Lo

0x02

0x00

0x0D

Response

Field Name (Hex)

Function 0x01

Byte Count 0x03

Output Status 2–10

Output Status 11–15

0xCD

0x0A

The status of outputs 2–10 is shown as the byte value 0xCD, or binary

1100 1101. Output 10 is the MSB of this byte, and output 2 is the LSB.

By convention, bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left, and the LSB to the right. Thus, the outputs in the first byte are ’10 through 2’, from left to right. In the last data byte, the status of outputs 15-11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A, or binary 0000 1010. Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left, and output 11 is the LSB of this byte. The four remaining high order bits are zero filled.

(0x03/0x04) Read Holding

Registers / Read Input

Registers

Read holding / input registers reads the measurement data from the instrument. Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response. These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers.

These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below. All of the values are reported as 32-bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format.

This uses 2 sequential registers, least significant 16 bits first.

The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers. Registers are addressed starting at zero. Therefore, registers numbered 1–16 are addressed as 0–15. The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register, with the binary contents right justified within each byte. For each register, the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits.


MODBUS Protocol

Function Codes

C-6 Model 17i Instruction Manual

Request

Function code

Starting Address

Quantity of Registers

1 Byte

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

0x03 or 0x04


1 to maximum allowed by instrument

Response

Function code

Byte count

Register value

*N = Quantity of Registers

Error Response

Function code

Exception code

1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04

1 Byte 2 x N*

N* x 2 Bytes N = N or N+1

1 Byte

1 Byte

Function code + 0x80



Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10–13:

Request

Field Name (Hex)

Function 0x03

Starting Address Hi 0x00

Starting Address Lo

No. of Registers Hi

No. of Registers Lo

0x09

0x00

0x04

Response

Field Name (Hex)

Function 0x03

Byte Count 0x06

Register value Hi (10)

Register value Lo (10)


0x02

0x2B

0x00


MODBUS Protocol

Function Codes






0x00

0x00

0x64

0x00

0x64

The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B.

Then contents of registers 11–13 are 0x00 0x00, 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively.

(0x05) Force (Write)

Single Coil

The force (write) single coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument, which triggers the respective action.

This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF. The request specifies the address of the action to be forced. Actions are addressed starting at zero. Therefore, action number 1 is addressed as 0.

The requested ON/OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field. A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON. A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF. All other values are illegal and will not affect the output. The normal response is an echo of the request, returned after the state has been written.

Request

Function code

Starting Address

Output Value

1 Byte

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

0x05


0x0000 or 0xFF00

Response

Function code

Starting Address

Output Value

Error Response

Function code

Exception code

1 Byte

2 Bytes

2 Bytes

1 Byte

1 Byte

0x05


0x0000 or 0xFF00

Function code + 0x80




MODBUS Protocol

MODBUS Parameters Supported

Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON:

Request

Field Name (Hex)

Function 05

Output Address Hi 00

Output Address Lo

Output Value Hi

Output Value Lo

05

FF

00

Response

Field Name (Hex)

Function 05

Output Address Hi 00

Output Address Lo

Output Value Hi

Output Value Lo

05

FF

00

MODBUS Parameters

Supported

The following Table C–1 through Table C–3 lists the MODBUS parameters supported for the Model 17i.

Table C–1. Read Coils for 17i

Coil Number Status

1 AUTORANGE

2 LOCAL/REMOTE

3 SERVICE

4 UNITS


12 NO CONC MAX ALARM



30

31

32

33

23

24

25

26

17

18

19

20

21

22

Coil Number

13

14

15

16

Status

NO CONC MIN ALARM

NO2 CONC MAX ALARM

NO2 CONC MIN ALARM

NOx CONC MAX ALARM

NOx CONC MIN ALARM

NH3 CONC MAX ALARM

NH3 CONC MIN ALARM

Nt CONC MAX ALARM

Nt CONC MIN ALARM

INTERNAL TEMP ALARM

CHAMBER TEMP ALARM

COOLER TEMP ALARM

NO2 CONVERTER TEMP ALARM

EXTERNAL CONVERTER TEMP ALARM

MODBUS Protocol


OZONE FLOW ALARM

MOTHERBOARD STATUS ALARM

INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM

I/O EXP BD STATUS ALARM

38 EXTERNAL CONVERTER STATUS

Table C–2. Read Registers for 17i

Register Number Variable

40001&40002 NO

40003&40004 NO2

Model 17i Instruction Manual C-9

MODBUS Protocol



40005&40006 NOx

40007&40008 NH3

40009&40010 Nt

40031&40032 RANGE

40041&40042 NO2 CONVERTER TEMP


40055&40056

40057&40058

40059&40060

40061&40062

40063&40064

40065&40066

40067&40068

40069&40070

ANALOG IN 1

ANALOG IN 2

ANALOG IN 3

ANALOG IN 4

ANALOG IN 5

ANALOG IN 6

ANALOG IN 7

ANALOG IN 8


MODBUS Protocol



40079&40080

40081&40082

40083&40084

40085&40086

40087&40088

40089&40090

40091&40092

40093&40094

40095&40096

40097&40098

40099&40100

40101&40102

40103&40104

40105&40106

40107&40108

NO CORRECTION CONC*

NO2 CORRECTION CONC*

NOx CORRECTION CONC*

NH3 CORRECTION CONC*

Nt CORRECTION CONC*

LOW NO CORRECTION CONC*

LOW NO2 CORRECTION CONC*

LOW NOx CORRECTION CONC*

LOW NH3 CORRECTION CONC*

LOW Nt CORRECTION CONC*

HIGH NO CORRECTION CONC*

HIGH NO2 CORRECTION CONC*

HIGH NOx CORRECTION CONC*

HIGH NH3 CORRECTION CONC*

HIGH Nt CORRECTION CONC*

*If O

2

Correction Option is installed.

Table C–3. Write Coils for 17i

Coil Number Action Triggered


108

109

110

111

CAL TO LO SPAN

AOUTS TO ZERO

AOUTS TO FS

CAL TO HI SPAN

Model 17i Instruction Manual C-11

Appendix D

Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen) Protocol

This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech (Bayern-Hessen or

BH) Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS-232/485 as well as

TCP/IP over Ethernet.

The Geysitech Commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document. The Geysitech protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample/zero/span mode if valid for that instrument. This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands listed below.

For details of the Model 17i Geysitech Protocol specification, see the following topics:

●

“ Serial Communication Parameters ” on page D-1

●

●

●

●

●

●

“ TCP Communication Parameters ” on page D-2

“ Instrument Address ” on page D-2

“ Abbreviations Used ” on page D-2

“ Basic Command Structure” on page D-2

“ Block Checksum ” on page D-3

“ Geysitech Commands ” on page D-3

Serial Communication

Parameters

The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support Geysitech protocol.

Number of Data bits

Number of Stop bits

: 8

: 1

Data rate : from 1200-115200 Baud (9600 is default)

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual D-1


TCP Communication Parameters

TCP Communication

Parameters

iSeries Instruments support the Geysitech/TCP protocol over TCP/IP. The register definition is the same as for the serial interface.

TCP connection port for Geysitech: 9882

Instrument Address

The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required (e.g. Instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or <SP><SP>1)

The instrument Address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C-Link and MODBUS commands. This can be set via the front panel.

The Instrument Address is represented by <address> in the examples throughout this document.

Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C-Link protocol. ▲

Abbreviations Used

The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document:

<CR> is abbreviation for Carriage Return (ASCII code 0x0D)

<STX> is abbreviation for Start of Text (ASCII code 0x02)

<ETX> is abbreviation for End of Text (ASCII code 0x03)

<SP> is abbreviation for space (ASCII code 0x20)

Basic Command

Structure

The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command:

<STX>Command text<ETX><BCC>

OR

<STX>Command text<CR>

Each Command is framed by control characters, <STX> at the start and terminated with either <ETX> or <CR>.

If a command is terminated with <ETX> then additional two characters

<BCC> is attached after <ETX>, this is the block checksum.

D-2 Model 17i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific


Block Checksum <BCC>

Block Checksum

<BCC>

The block checksum is calculated beginning with a seed value of

00000000, binary (0x00), and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string (or response) including the framing characters <STX> and <ETX>. The checksum works as an error check. The command terminator determines the presence or absence of <BCC>.

If a command is terminated by <ETX> then the next two characters are the checksum, if the command is terminated with <CR> no checksum is attached

The block checksum is represented by two characters, which represent a 2 digit hex number (1byte). (e.g. 1 byte 0xAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters ‘A’ & ’B’)

The checksum is referred to as <BCC> throughout this document.

Geysitech Commands

The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol:

●

●

Instrument Control Command (ST)

Data Sampling/Data Query Command (DA)

Instrument Control Command

(ST)

There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol.

This <control command> is a single letter, which triggers an action in the instrument. These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero/span option is present.

Command ‘N’ switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode.

Command ‘K’ switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode.

Command ‘M’ switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode.

The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command:

<STX>ST<address><control command><ETX><BCC>

OR

<STX>ST<address><control command><CR>

OR

<STX>ST<address><SP><control command><CR>

OR

<STX>ST<address><SP><control command><ETX><BCC>

Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 17i Instruction Manual D-3


Geysitech Commands

The <address> is optional, which means it can be left out completely. The

<address> if present must match the Instrument Address. Additional space can be present after the <address>.

If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the

<address> does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored.

This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode, instrument id 5:

<STX>ST005<SP>N<CR>

Data Sampling/Data

Query Command

(DA)

This command DA initiates a data transfer from the instrument. The instrument responds with measurement data, which depends on the range mode and is listed in “ Measurements reported in response to DA command ” below.

The command structure for a data query command is as follows:

<STX>DA<address><ETX><BCC>

The <address> is optional, which means it can be left out completely. The

<address> if present must match the Instrument Address. Additional space can be present after the <address>.

If the <address> is left out then no space is allowed in the query string.

A command with no address is also a valid command.

The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5:

<STX>DA<CR>

<STX>DA005<CR>

<STX>DA<SP><SP>5<ETX><BCC>

<STX>DA<ETX><BCC>

The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with <STX> which is followed by the characters

DA, and the <address> (if present) matches the Instrument Address, and the command is terminated with either <CR> with no checksum or <ETX> followed by the correct checksum <BCC>.




Geysitech Commands

Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command (DA):

In response to a valid data query command (DA) the instrument responds in the following format:

<STX>MD02<SP><address><SP><measured value1><SP><status><SP><SFKT><SP><address+1><SP><measured value2><SP ><status><SP><SFKT><ETX><BCC>

The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i.e. if the received command was terminated with a <CR> the response is terminated with <CR> and if the command was terminated with a <ETX><BCC> the response is terminated with<ETX> and the computed checksum <BCC>.

The 02 after the MD indicates, that two measurements are present in the reply string, (a 03 for three measurements and so on, this will also determine the length of the reply string).

<address> is the Instrument Address. Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the <address + X> where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included.

<measured value> is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent, each with sign.

Mantissa: sign and 4 digits. The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted.

Exponent: sign and 2 digits.

Example:

-5384000.0 is represented as -5384+06

+0.04567 is represented as +4567-02

<status>: is formed by < operating status > and < error status > and separated by a space i.e.

<operating status><SP><error status>

Each of the two (<operating status> and <error status>) are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte (8 Bits) operation status and one byte (8 Bits) error status.

These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant. For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D–1 and Table D–2 below.

<SFKT>: is the space provided for future use for special function, it currently contains a string of ten 0’s i.e. <0000000000>.

Model 17i Instruction Manual D-5


Geysitech Commands

Example:

Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations (Instrument

ID is 1, Operation Status is 03, Error Status is 04):

Data Query String:

<STX>DA<CR>

Reply String:

<STX>MD03<SP>001<SP>+2578+01<SP>03 <SP>04<SP>0000000000 <SP>002 <SP>

  

Address First Concentration(E-format)=25.78 Address+1

+5681+00<SP>03<SP>04<SP>0000000000<SP>003<SP>+1175+01<SP>03<SP>04<SP

  

Second Concentration = 5.681 Address+2 Third Concentration=11.75

0000000000<SP><CR>

The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units. The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode then a value of 0.0 will be reported.

Measurements reported in response to DA command

The following measurements reported in response to DA command are for the Model 17i.

Single Range Mode

The 5 measurements reported in single range mode include:

●

NO

●

●

NO

2

NO x

●

●

NH

3

N t

Dual/Auto Range Mode

The 10 measurements reported in dual or auto range modes include:

●

●

●

●

● low NO

2 low NO x low NH

3 high NO high NO high NH low N t high N t

2 x

3



Geysitech Commands

Operating and Error

Status

See Table D–1 for operating status and Table D–2 for error status for the

Model 17i.

Table D–1. Operating Status for Model 17i

 Bit

Operating status:

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

MSB LSB


Gas Unit Indication (ppm OR ppb) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Table D–2. Error Status for Model 17i

 Bit

Error status:

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

MSB LSB

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Model 17i Instruction Manual D-7